Catálogo Disjuntores 3VT LV36 2014 en

© Siemens AG 2014
3VT Molded Case

Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A
SENTRON
Catalog Edition
LV 36 2014
Answers for infrastructure and cities.

© Siemens AG 2014
Related catalogs Contents
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10 · ·

Air circuit breakers Molded case circuit breakers Miniature circuit
· ··
breakers Residual current protective devices / AFDDs units Fuse sys-
Electrical Installation Technology
· · · · ·
tems Overvoltage protection devices Switch disconnectors Switch-
·· ·
SENTRON SIVACON ALPHA ing devices Transformers, power supply units and socket outlets
Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring
Devices, Switchboards and Distribution Systems · ··
Busbar systems Measuring devices and power monitoring Monitoring
·
devices Software Switchboards Busbar trunking systems System
·
cubicles, system lighting and system air-conditioning Distribution
E86060-K8280-A101-A1-7600 · ·
boards Molded-plastic distribution systems Spring-loaded terminals
3WT Air Circuit Breakers LV 35 3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A

up to 4000 A
E86060-K1836-A101-A6-7600
1
3VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers LV 36 ·

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A 3VT2 Molded
up to 1600 A ·
Case Circuit Breakers up to 250 A 3VT3 Molded Case Circuit
·
Breakers up to 630 A 3VT4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up
·
to 1000 A 3VT5 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A
PDF (E86060-K1836-A101-A6-7600)
ALPHA FIX LV 52 ·
iPo plug-in terminals iPo installation terminals ·
Terminal Blocks ·
Spring-loaded terminals Combination plug-in terminals ·
·
Insulation displacement terminals Screw terminals ·
Accessories for terminal blocks
E86060-K1852-A101-A2-7600
Products for Automation and Drives CA 01 All products of automation and drives technology and of low-
Interactive Catalog, DVD voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology
E86060-D4001-A510-D3-7600
Industry Mall All products of automation and drives technology and of low-
Information and Ordering Platform voltage power distribution and electrical installation technology
in the Internet:
www.siemens.com/industrymall
Catalog PDF All catalogs for low-voltage power distribution and electrical
installation technology can be downloaded as PDF files and
e-books.
Internet:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial
Trademarks Technical Support

All product designations may be registered trademarks or Expert advice on technical questions with a
product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. wide range of demand-optimized services
Third parties using these trademarks or product names for for all our products and systems.
their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trade-
mark owners.
Further information about low-voltage power distribution and
electrical installation is available on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/industrymall www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
Siemens · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014
SENTRON 3VT1
1
3VT Molded Case Molded Case Circuit Breakers
up to 160 A
Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A
Catalog LV 36 · 2014
3VT2
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2
up to 250 A
The products and sys-

tems described in this
catalog are manufac-
tured/distributed under
application of a certified
quality management
3VT3
3
system in accordance up to 630 A
with DIN EN ISO 9001.
The certificate is
recognized by all IQNet
countries.
3VT4
4
up to 1000 A
Supersedes:
Catalog LV 36 · 2011
Refer to the Industry Mall for current updates

of this catalog:
3VT5
5
www.siemens.com/industrymall up to 1600 A
The products contained in this
catalog can also be found in the
Interactive Catalog CA 01.
Article No.:
E86060-D4001-A510-D3-7600 Appendix
6
Please contact your local Siemens branch.
© Siemens AG 2013
© Siemens AG 2014
The right one for everyone Sustainability in focus
Our portfolio includes switchboards, As a worldwide leader in the provision of

distribution boards, protection, switching, high-quality, standards-compliant prod-
measuring and monitoring devices, ucts and systems for low-voltage power
switches and socket outlets. All over the distribution, we contribute to the sustain-
world, the universality, modularity and able and responsible handling of electrical
intelligence of our components and energy. With our integrated portfolio
systems give you innumerable benefits – which ranges from power supply and
all the time they are in use. Developed distribution, through short-circuit protec-
according to the respective international tion and overload protection through to
standards, we offer forward-looking power monitoring, we support the imple-
design with innovative functions and mentation of environmentally friendly
ensure the highest quality standards energy concepts on the basis of wind
world-wide power, photovoltaics, intelligent buildings
and electromobility.
2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014
Universal, safe and intelligent

power distribution
Whether in industrial plants, in infrastructure or in
buildings: every technical plant depends on the reliable
supply of electricity. Our products provide a safe, reliable
and efficient electrical infrastructure at the medium- and
low-voltage levels. Our components reliably protect
against accidents, disturbances and fires caused by
electrical installations and allow consumers to utilize
electrical power in a sustainable, responsible manner.
We are happy to help you with comprehensive support
from the initial information through to operation.
Everything for power distribution Excellent support
Consistent solutions are required for elec- As a competent and reliable partner, we
trical power distribution in buildings. Our also offer you comprehensive support –
answer is Totally Integrated Power (TIP). from the initial information, through plan-
TIP stands for innovative products, sys- ning, configuring and ordering to com-
tems and software tools which ensure the missioning, operation and technical sup-
safe and reliable distribution of electric port. We know the needs of your working
power. They are supplemented by com- environment and your daily business.
munication-capable circuit breakers and Based on this, we give you flexible and
modules which connect the power distri- high quality support, which allows you to
bution system to the building automation concentrate on your customers and their
system or industrial automation solu- needs.
tions. These in turn can be linked to a
comprehensive energy management sys-
tem which contributes to optimizing the
consumption of electricity and hence to
lowering the costs of operation.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3
© Siemens AG 2014
New developments
Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism can be defeated. Terminal cover protection. For 3VT4 and for 3VT5 → page 4/7 or 5/7
For 3VT2 and for 3VT3 → page 2/6 or 3/6
© Siemens AG 2014
Get all the information you need –

with just one click
LV Explorer – Discover
Low Voltage in 3D
Get comprehensive and
specific information
about our products
using our 3D anima-
tions, trailers and
technical information.
Always at your service

– every step of the way
We offer comprehensive
support, from planning
to configuration to
operation.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5
© Siemens AG 2014
Notice
1
© Siemens AG 2014
3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
Catalog 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
1/2 General data
1/3 Circuit breakers · Switch disconnectors
Accessories and Components
1/6 Auxiliary switches · auxiliary trip units
1/7 Manual/motorized operating mechanisms
1/9 Residual current devices
1/10 Connecting accessories
1/11 Mounting accessories
Technical Information 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
1/16 Trip units
1/22 Auxiliary switches
1/24 Auxiliary trip units
1/25 Rotary operating mechanisms
1/28 Motorized operating mechanism
1/34 Insulating barriers and terminal covers
1/36 Residual current devices
Project Planning Assistance
1/39 Dimensional drawings
Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014
3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

Catalog
General data
1 ■ Overview
Versions and accessories
Connecting sets
3
4
2 5
6
7
Circuit breaker
9 10
29
11
8
12 13 14
28 31
30
NSO0_00258b
Rotary operating mechanism
15
17
18
19
20
16
23
27
22
26
21 24 25
1 3VT circuit breaker 11 Adapter to install on 35 mm DIN rail 22 Coupling driver

2 Circular conductor terminal 12 Lockingtype lever 23 Telescopic extension shaft
3 Front connection 13 Signal switch 24 Lockable knob
4 Rear connection 14 Auxiliary switch 25 Lockable knob
5 Auxiliary conductor terminal 15 Mechanical parallel switching 26 Coupling driver
6 Front connecting bus with increased 16 Mechanical interlocking 27 Extension shaft
pole spacing 17 Front manual operating mechanism 28 Extension Cable
7 Insulating barriers 18 Front manual operating mechanism 29 Residual current device (RCD)
8 Laterally mounted motorized 19 Lateral manual operating mechanism (right) module
operating mechanism 20 Lateral manual operating mechanism (left) 30 Connection set for RCD, short
9 Shunt trip unit 21 Non lockable knob 31 Connection set for RCD, long
10 Undervoltage trip unit
1/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
Circuit breakers · Switch disconnectors
■ Overview 1
Circuit breaker Switch disconnector
Circuit breaker, 3-/4-pole versions Switch disconnector, 3-/4-pole versions
The 3- or 4-pole versions of the circuit breakers include: The 3- or 4-pole versions of the switch disconnectors include:
• 2 connecting sets (box terminals), for connecting Cu/Al • 2 connecting sets (box terminals), for connecting Cu/Al
cables1) with cross-sections of 2.5 ... 95 mm2 cables1) with cross-sections of 2.5 ... 95 mm2
(these terminals are connected to the circuit breaker) (these terminals are connected to the switch disconnector)
• insulating barriers • insulating barriers
• set of two mounting bolts (M3 x 30) • set of two mounting bolts (M3 x 30)
■ Selection and ordering data

Rated current In Current setting of the Operating current of the DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
inverse-time instantaneous short cir- P. unit per PU
delayed overcurrent cuit releases "I" Ii approx.
releases "L" IR
A A A kg
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic L2)
TM3), LI function, 3-pole
• with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit,
fixed short-circuit trip unit
40 40 160 3VT1704-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 50 200 3VT1705-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 63 252 3VT1706-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 80 320 3VT1708-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.050
100 100 400 3VT1710-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
125 125 500 3VT1712-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
160 160 640 3VT1716-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
TM, LI function, 3-pole + N, for unprotected N-conductor
• with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit,
40 40 160 3VT1704-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 50 200 3VT1705-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 63 252 3VT1706-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 80 320 3VT1708-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 100 400 3VT1710-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 125 500 3VT1712-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 160 640 3VT1716-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
TM, LIN function, 4-pole, for protected N-conductor, Per-
missible load of N pole is 100%
• with permanently fixed overload trip unit,
40 40 160 3VT1704-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 50 200 3VT1705-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 63 252 3VT1706-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 80 320 3VT1708-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 100 400 3VT1710-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 125 500 3VT1712-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 160 640 3VT1716-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1) For other connection methods, use connecting sets, see page 1/10
2)
See pages 1/16 (3-pole) and 1/21 (4-pole)
3)
TM = Thermal-magnetic trip unit.
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/3
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
1 Rated current In Current setting of the Operating current of the DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
inverse-time instantaneous short cir- P. unit per PU
delayed overcurrent cuit releases "I" Ii approx.
releases "L" IR
A A A kg
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic D1)
TM, LI function 3-pole
• with adjustable thermal overload trip unit,
adjustable short-circuit trip unit
16 12.5 ... 16 160 ... 240 3VT1701-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
20 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 3VT1702-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
25 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 3VT1792-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
32 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
40 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.038
50 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
100 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
125 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
160 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.070
TM, LI function 3-pole +N, for unprotected N-conductor
16 12.5 ... 16 160 ... 240 3VT1701-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
20 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 3VT1702-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
25 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 3VT1792-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
32 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
TM, LIN function, 4-pole, for protected N-conductor, Per-
missible load of N pole is 100%
16 12.5 ... 16 160 ... 240 3VT1701-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
20 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 3VT1702-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
25 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 3VT1792-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
32 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1) See pages 1/16 (3-pole) and 1/21 (4-pole)

1/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
Rated current In Current setting of the Operating current of the DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
1
inverse-time delayed instantaneous short circuit P. unit per PU
overcurrent releases "L" releases "I" Ii approx.
IR
A A A kg
Circuit breakers, for short-circuit protection only (tripping characteristic N1)),
for starter combination
TM, I function, 3-pole
• without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit
32 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
40 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
63 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
80 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
100 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.050
125 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.059
160 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
TM, I function, 3-pole +N, for unprotected conductors
32 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
TM, I function, 4P, for protected N conductor,
Permissible load of N pole is 100%
32 32 160 ... 320 3VT1703-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 40 200 ... 400 3VT1704-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 50 250 ... 500 3VT1705-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 63 315 ... 630 3VT1706-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 80 400 ... 800 3VT1708-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 100 500 ... 1000 3VT1710-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 125 625 ... 1250 3VT1712-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 160 800 ... 1600 3VT1716-2EG46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic M2), for motor protection
TM, LI function, 3-pole
• with adjustable thermal overload trip units, fixed short-circuit trip units
16 12.5 ... 16 160 3VT1701-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
20 16 ... 20 200 3VT1702-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
25 20 ... 25 250 3VT1792-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
32 25 ... 32 315 3VT1703-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
40 32 ... 40 400 3VT1704-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 40 ... 50 500 3VT1705-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 50 ... 63 625 3VT1706-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 63 ... 80 800 3VT1708-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.059
100 80 ... 100 1000 3VT1710-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
Switch disconnectors
Switch disconnector, without overload protection, without short
circuit protection
160 3-pole 3VT1716-2DE36-0AA0 1 unit 1.015
160 4-pole 3VT1716-2EE46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1)
See page 1/16 (3-pole)
2) See pages 1/16 and 1/20

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/5
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog - Accessories and Components
Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
1 ■ Overview
Circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• auxiliary switches, tion. A control supply voltage is required.
• alarm switches, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• shunt trip units, when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
• undervoltage trip units. trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-
voltage. A control supply voltage is required.

Rated control supply voltage Us DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz or DC kg
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Auxiliary switches for signalling the state of the main contacts
• AC/DC 60 ... 250 V 3VT9100-2AB10 1 unit 0.020
• AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9100-2AB20 1 unit 0.010
Alarm switches for signalling the tripping of the circuit breaker

by an trip unit
• AC/DC 60 ... 250 V 3VT9100-2AH10 1 unit 0.020
• AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9100-2AH20 1 unit 0.010
Shunt trip units

Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
tion.
• DC 12 V 3VT9100-1SB00 1 unit 0.050
• AC/DC 24, 48 V 3VT9100-1SC00 1 unit 0,050
• AC 110, 230 V/DC 110, 220 V 3VT9100-1SD00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 230, 400 V/DC 220 V 3VT9100-1SE00 1 unit 0.050
Undervoltage trip units

Undervoltage trip units trip the circuit breaker automatically when
the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue
• AC 24, 48 V 3VT9100-1UC00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 110, 230 V 3VT9100-1UD00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 230, 400 V 3VT9100-1UE00 1 unit 0.050
• DC 24, 48 V 3VT9100-1UU00 1 unit 0.050
• DC 110, 220 V 3VT9100-1UV00 1 unit 0.050

1/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Manual/motorized operating mechanisms
■ Overview 1
Rotary operating mechanisms • For operating through side panel of switchgear cabinet (lateral
operation):
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the fol- - 3VT9100-3HE../HF.. knob
lowing parts: - 3VT9100-3HG../HH.. coupling driver
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: - 3VT9100-3HJ.. extension shaft
- 3VT9100-3HE../HF.. knob
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door:
- 3VT9100-3HE../HF.. knob • The mechanical interlocking must be combined from the fol-
- 3VT9100-3HG../HH.. coupling driver lowing parts:
- 3VT9100-3HJ.. extension shaft, - 2 x 3VT9100-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanisms
(cannot be used with lateral operation)
- 2 x 3VT9100-3HE/HF.. knobs (standard) or
1 x 3VT9100-3HE/HF.. knob (parallel switching)

Version Color DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Rotary operating mechanisms
• not lockable gray 3VT9100-3HA10 1 unit 0.079
• lockable with padlock gray 3VT9100-3HA20 1 unit 0.122
• lockable with padlock yellow 3VT9100-3HB20 1 unit 0.079
• for lateral operation, gray 3VT9100-3HC10 1 unit 0.137

mounted on the left side,
not lockable
• for lateral operation, gray 3VT9100-3HD10 1 unit 0.137
mounted on the right side,
not lockable
Knob
• not lockable black 3VT9100-3HE10 1 unit 0.019
• lockable with padlock black 3VT9100-3HE20 1 unit 0.021
• lockable with padlock red 3VT9100-3HF20 1 unit 0.019
Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism

(with defeat mechanism)
Additionally requires
3VT9100-3HE10 or 3VT9100-3HE20
black knob
• degree of protection IP40 black 3VT9100-3HG10 1 unit 0.042
Additionally requires
3VT9100-3HF20 red knob
• degree of protection IP40 yellow 3VT9100-3HH10 1 unit 0.042
Extension shaft
• length 350 mm, can be shortened 3VT9100-3HJ10 1 unit 0.113
• length 199 ... 352 mm, telescopic 3VT9100-3HJ20 1 unit 0.092

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/7
© Siemens AG 2014

1 Version Color DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Mechanical interlocking
The mechanical interlocks additionally require the following parts:
• 2 x 3VT9 100-3HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms
• 1 or 2 x 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. knobs
Mechanical interlocking 3VT9100-8LA00 1 unit 0.089
Mechanical interlocking for parallel switching 3VT9100-8LB00 1 unit 0.109

P. unit per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz or DC kg
Motorized operating mechanism
Laterally mounted motorized operating mechanism
For a detailed description see page 1/28.
• AC/DC 24 V 3VT9100-3MA00 1 unit 0.900
• AC/DC 48 V 3VT9100-3MB00 1 unit 0.900
• AC/DC 110 V 3VT9100-3MD00 1 unit 0.900
• AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9100-3ME00 1 unit 0.900

1/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Residual current devices
■ Selection and ordering data 1

Circuit breakers for system protection, only for TM1), starters,
disconnectors
Rated current IN Residual Delay time td, Rated opera- DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
current IΔn, adjustable tional voltage Ue P. unit per PU
adjustable approx.
A A s V AC kg
RCD modules
4-pole
160 0.030 instantaneous 80 ... 440 3VT9116-5GA40 1 unit 1.277
0.100 0.1
0.300 0.2
0.500 0.3
1.000 0.5
3.000 1
4-pole
160 0.300 instantaneous 80 ... 440 3VT9116-5GB40 1 unit 1.277
Accessories for RCD modules

Connection set, short
3-pole 3VT9115-5GY31 1 unit 0.491
4-pole 3VT9115-5GY41 1 unit 0.645
Connection set, long

3-pole 3VT9116-5GY32 1 unit 0.504
4-pole 3VT9116-5GY42 1 unit 0.662
1)
Thermal-magnetic

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/9
© Siemens AG 2014

Connecting accessories
1 ■ Selection and ordering data
Version Conductor Type of DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
cross-sections S connection P. unit per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Connecting set for 3-pole version
Terminals for front connection -- Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9100-4TA30 1 unit 0.055
1 set = 3 units cable lugs
Terminals for circular conductors 2 x 25 ... 120 Cu/Al cable 3VT9100-4TF30 1 unit 0,240
1 set = 3 units
Set includes a terminal cover, degree of
protection IP20
Terminals for rear connection Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9100-4RC30 1 unit 0.179

Rotation in 45-degree increments
Auxiliary conductor terminals 1.5 ... 2.5; Cu flexible 3VT9100-4TN30 1 unit 0.010
4 ... 6 conductors
Front connection bars Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9100-4ED30 1 unit 0.108

Increases pole spacing cable lugs
1 set = 3 units
Terminals for 4-pole version

Terminal for front connection -- Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9100-4TA00 1 unit 0.015
1 set = 1 unit cable lugs
For 4th pole (to be used with
3VT9100-4TA30 connecting set)
Terminals for circular conductors 2 x 25 ... 120 Cu/Al cable 3VT9100-4TF40 1 unit 0,250
1 set = 4units
Set includes a terminal cover, degree of
protection IP20
Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al-busbars, 3VT9100-4RC00 1 unit 0.080

For 4th pole (to be used with
3VT9100-4RC30 connecting set)
For 4th pole (to be used with 4 ... 6 conductor
3VT9100-4TN30 connecting set)

1/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Mounting accessories

Description DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
3-pole version
Insulating barriers for circuit breakers 3VT9100-8CE30 1 unit 0.053
Included in the scope of supply of the circuit breaker or switch disconnector
In case of feed-in from below (power supply connected to terminals 2, 4 , 6), it
is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side
For more information, see page 1/34.
Terminal protection cover, degree of protection IP20
Increases degree of protection of the connection point to 3-pole 3VT9100-8CA30 1 unit 0.091
degree of protection IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs.
4-pole 3VT9100-8CA40 1 unit 0.080
Locking devices for toggle levers 3VT9100-3HL00 1 unit 0.015

• Enables locking of circuit breaker or switch disconnector in "switched off
manually" position
• Locking is possible using a padlock with a shank diameter of up to 4 mm.
4-pole version
Insulating barrier for circuit breakers 3VT9100-8CE00 1 unit 0.020
• Included in the scope of supply of circuit breaker or switch disconnector
• In case of feed-in from below, (power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6,
N), it is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side
For more information, see page 1/35.
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20 3VT9100-8CA40 1 unit 0.080

Increases the degree of protection of the connecting point to
degree of protection IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs
3-pole/4-pole version
For mounting on a 35 mm standard DIN mounting rail and RCD 3VT9100-4PP30 1 unit 0.065
For dimensions, see page 1/46.
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism 3VT9100-3MF00 1 unit 0.056

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/11
© Siemens AG 2014

Technical Information
1 ■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-section of cables, busbars and flexibars
Main circuit Rated Conductor cross-section S Busbars W x H
• The main circuit is connected with Cu or AI busbars, cables, current In Solid Stranded Solid
and possibly cables with cable lugs. Cu AI Cu AI
• For further connecting options, connecting sets can be used
(see page 1/10). A mm2 mm2 mm mm
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected 16 2,5 -- -- --
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to 20 2,5 -- -- --
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). It is possible to reverse the current flow 25 4 -- -- --
inside the unit (i. e. infeed from below) without reducing the ra- 32 6 -- -- --
ted short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu.
40 10 -- -- --
• In case of infeed from below, the units must additionally be fit-
ted with 3VT9100-8CE30 insulating barriers on the side of ter- 50 10 16 -- --
minals 2, 4, 6 (see pages 1/34 and 1/35). 63 16 25 -- --
• We recommend painting the connection busbars. 80 25 35 -- --
• Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically 100 35 50 16 x 2; 12 x 3 16 x 4; 12 x 5
reinforced to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces to the 125 50 70 16 x 4; 12 x 5 16 x 5; 12 x 6
circuit breaker during short-circuiting.
160 70 95 16 x 5; 12 x 6 16 x 6; 12 x 8
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the
deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is
not obstructed (see pages 1/34 and 1/35).
Auxiliary circuits
Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connec-
ted to the terminals of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ... 1 mm2.
Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for 3VT1
Ik ≤ 25 kA
70
70
Conductor cross-sections of main terminals

Article No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-sections S Max. width of Dimensional
permitted Cable type busbars and drawings
current Imax cable lugs
Sector-shaped Sector-shaped con- Round conductor, Round conductor,
conductor, stranded ductor, solid stranded solid
A mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm See page

3-pole
3VT9100-4TF30 160 2 x 251) ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 251) ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 1/39
3VT9100-4TA30 160 16
3VT9100-4RC30 160 16 1/40
3VT9100-4TN30 10/16 1.5 ... 2.5/4 ... 6 -- --
3VT9100-4ED30 160 30 1/40
4-pole
3VT9100-4TF40 160 2 x 251) ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 251) ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 1/44
3VT9100-4TA00 160 16
3VT9100-4RC00 160 16 1/44
3VT9100-4TN00 10/16 1.5 ... 2.5/4 ... 6
1)
Required sleeves for cable end: Fine Strand: Yes, Strand: No. For cross-sections from 25 mm2 up to 50 mm2 only with tubular cable lugs
for stranded conductors
1/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Technical specifications 1
Article No. 3VT17..-2..36-0AA0 3VT1716-2DE36-0AA0 3VT17..-2..46-0AA0 3VT1716-2EE46-0AA0
Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Circuit breakers 3) Switch disconnectors
Number of poles 3 4
Standards EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2 EN 60 947-3,IEC 947-3 EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2 EN 60 947-3,IEC 947-3
Approval marks
Rated current In A 16 ... 1602) -- 16 ... 1602) --

2)
Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 16 ... 160 160 16 ... 1602) 160
Rated operational current Ie A -- 160 -- 160
Rated operational voltage Ue V max. AC 690, max. DC 250 max. AC 690, max. DC 440
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Utilization category
• selectivity AC 690 V A -- A --
• switching mode AC-3 (16 ... 100 A) AC-23 A AC-3 (16 ... 100 A) AC-23 A
AC-2 (100 ... 160 A) DC-22 A AC-2 (100 ... 160 A) DC-22 A
DC-22 A DC-22 A
Rated short-time withstand current Icw /t -- 2 kA/ 1 s -- 2 kA/1 s
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity 25 kA/DC 250 V -- 20 kA/DC 440V --
(rms value)1) Icu/Ue (τ = max. 15 ms) (τ = max. 15 ms)
6 kA/AC 690 V 6 kA/AC 690 V
12 kA/AC 500 V 12 kA/AC 500 V
25 kA/AC 415 V 25 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 230 V 40 kA/AC 230 V
Off-time at Icu ms 7 -- 7 --
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity 13 kA/DC 250 V -- 13 kA/DC 440V --
(rms value) Ics/Ue (τ = max. 10 ms) (τ = max. 10 ms)
3 kA/AC 690 V 3 kA/AC 690 V
6 kA/AC 500 V 6 kA/AC 500 V
13 kA/AC 415 V 13 kA/AC 415 V
20 kA/AC 230 V 20 kA/AC 230 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity 52 kA/AC 415 V 2,83 kA/AC 415 V 52 kA/AC 415 V 2,83 kA/AC 415 V
(peak value) Icm/Ue
Losses per pole at In = 160 A4) W 15
Mechanical endurance cycles 20 000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 6 000
Frequency of switching cycles/hr 120
Operating force N 55 65
Front side device protection IP40
Terminal protection IP20
Operating conditions
Reference ambient temperature °C 40
Ambient temperature range °C -40 ... +55
Working environment dry and tropical climate
Degree of pollution 3
Max. elevation m 2000
Seismic resistance m/s2 3 g at 8 ... 50 Hz
Design modifications
Front/rear connection ✓/✓
Plug-in version --
Withdrawable version --
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/–/✓/–
Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch ✓/✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with ✓/–/✓
alarm switch
Front hand drive/lateral drive right/left ✓/✓/✓
Mechanical interlocking to the manual drive --/-- --/--
by Bowden wire
Motor. oper. mechanism/with oper. counter ✓/-- ✓/--
Locking-type lever ✓
✓ available, -- unavailable, + in preparation 4) For In <160A, see table page 1/14.
1) When reversing the circuit breaker connection (power supply connected to
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N) output to terminals 1, 3, 5, (N)), Icu does not change.
2) Ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics, see page 1/17.
3) Permissible load of N pole is 100%.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/13

© Siemens AG 2014

1 ■ Schematics
Circuit breakers with accessories
3-pole version
Switches or Auxiliary releases Main circuit Switches
auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary
6.2
6.4
5.2
5.4
4.2
4.4
10.Y1
D1
10.Y1
C1
1 3 5
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
3VT9100-1U.00
3VT9100-1S.00
TEST
Q V
U< U
or 1.3VT9100-2AB10
6.3VT9100-2AB10
5.3VT9100-2AB10
4.3VT9100-2AB10
1.3VT9100-2AH10
2.3VT9100-2AB10
3.3VT9100-2AB10
or
I>
10.Y2
10.Y2
NSO0_00523b
INSPECTION
1.1
1.1
2.1
3.1
6.1
5.1
4.1
D2
C2
J 2 4 6
acc.comp. No. 10 acc.c. No. 6 acc.c. No. 5 acc.c. No. 4 acc.c. No. 1 acc.c. No. 2 acc.c. No. 3
Explanations TEST pushbutton

J 3VT1 circuit breaker Pressing the TEST pushbutton switches the circuit brea-
Q main contacts ker/switch disconnector off and actuates the auxiliary switches.
V trip-free mechanism
TEST test push button
3VT9100-1U.00 undervoltage trip unit
3VT9100-1S.00 shunt trip unit
INSPECTION inspection push button
acc. c. accessory compartment
acc. comp. accessory compartment
Power losses (per pole)

Rated current In Power loss P per pole of circuit
breaker at maximum current
A W
TEST
pushbutton
16 4
20 4
25 4
32 4
40 4
50 5 Indication of circuit breaker tripping
63 6 When the circuit breaker was tripped by the overcurrent
80 7 trip unit, the following symbol is displayed: " "
100 10
125 15
160 15
Inspection
push button
Inspection push button

by pressing you will simulate tripping of the circuit breaker by the
overcurrent release, including actuating of the auxiliary switches
and signal switch. Pressing requires a suitable instrument, such
as wire with cross-section about 1 mm.
1/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

4-pole version 1
Switches
auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
9.2
9.4
8.2
8.4
7.2
7.4
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
9.1
8.1
7.1
J
acc.c. No. 9 acc.c. No. 8 acc.c. No. 7
Switches or Auxiliary starters Main circuit Switches

auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary
6.2
6.4
5.2
5.4
4.2
4.4
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
10.Y1
D1
C1
10.Y1
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
N 1 3 5
3VT9 100-1U.00
3VT9 100-1S.00
TEST
Q V
U< U
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AH.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
or
I>
T
10.Y2
10.Y2
NSO0_00001b
INSPECTION or
6.1
5.1
4.1
D2
C2
1.1
1.1
2.1
3.1
J N 2 4 6
acc.c. No. 6 acc.c. No. 5 acc.c. No. 4 acc.comp. No. 10 acc.c. No. 1 acc.c. 2 acc.c. 3
Explanations
J 3VT1 circuit breakers

Q main contacts
T thermomagnetic trip unit
3-pole +N (3 poles protected, N-pole unprotected)
4-pole (all four poles protected)
V trip-free mechanism
TEST test pushbutton
3VT9100-1U.00 undervoltage trip unit
3VT9100-1S.00 shunt trip unit
INSPECTION inspection push button
acc. c. accessory compartment
acc. comp. accessory compartment
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/15

© Siemens AG 2014

Technical Information - Accessories and Components
Trip units
1 ■ Overview
Trip units, 3-pole version Circuit breakers with characteristic
Trip units are integrated in the circuit breakers. "L":
Tripping characteristics L I
Circuit breakers are available with four types of tripping charac-

teristics. They are designated with the letters: t
"L" - lines
For protection of lines with low starting currents
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "L" have a pre-set and
fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers feature In values
in a standardized current range from 40 A to 160 A (see "Ranges
of trip units and their possible settings"). Short-circuit trip units
are fixed at 4 x In.
"D" - distribution
NSO0_00502
For protection of lines and transformers
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "D" have the option of
setting to a reduced current in a range of approximately 0.75 ... I
1 In. The circuit breakers feature In values in a standardized cur-
rent range from 16 A to 160 A (see "Ranges of trip units and their "M":
possible settings"). The short-circuit trip unit is adjustable. L I
Setting values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
Ir
"M" - motor t
For motor protection
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "M" have the option of
setting a reduced current in a range of approximately
0.75 ... 1 In. The circuit breakers feature In values in a standar-
dized series of currents from 16 A to 100 A (see "Ranges of trip
units and their possible setting"). The short-circuit trip unit is
fixed at the value of 10 x In.
See page 1/20.
NSO0_00048
"N" - short-circuit trip unit only

3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "N" have a short circuit
trip unit only. They feature In values in a standardized series of
I
currents ranging from 32 A to 160 A. The short-circuit trip unit is
adjustable. "D":
The values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
L I
Article Numbers
Ir
The article number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated cur- t
rent and on the tripping characteristics.
For example: Motor protection with In = 32 A.
The article number is: 3VT1703-3DM36-0AA0.
Setting of tripping characteristics
• Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L (for circuit breakers
with characteristics "D" and "M"). The time-dependent trip unit
for overload protection Ir (instantaneous) is adjusted in a con- Ii
tinuous range using the Ir adjustment dial on the overload trip
NSO0_00500
unit. The Ir adjustment range is 0.75 ... 1 In.

• Time-independent trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I
(for circuit breakers with characteristics "D" and "N"). With an I
time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short "N":
circuit current Ii), adjustment is possible within a continuous
range. L I
All values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
t
Ii
NSO0_00216
1/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Derating in accordance with ambient temperature 1
Rated Permissible load at
current In
A + 70 °C + 65 °C +60 °C + 55 °C + 50 °C + 40 °C +20 °C -15 ~ -40 °C
16 14 14.5 14.5 15 15.5 16 17 19
20 18 18.5 18.5 19 19.5 20 22 25
25 21 21.5 22 23 24 25 28 31
32 25 27 28 29 30.5 32 36 41
40 34 35.5 37 38 39 40 45 53
50 43 45 47 48 49 50 56 66
63 50 53 55 57 59 63 69 83
80 63 67 70 73 75 80 88 100
100 80 84 88 92 95 100 108 122
125 97 102 107 112 117 125 133 145
160 130 135 140 145 151 160 168 175
Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 40 °C

Rated 3VT17..-2DA36-0AA0 3VT17..-2DC36-0AA0 3VT17..-2DM36-0AA0 3VT17..-2DB36-0AA0
current In Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit
protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins-
tantaneous) tantaneous) tantaneous) tantaneous)
A A A A A A A A A
16 -- -- 12,5 ... 16 160 ... 240 12,5 ... 16 160 -- --
20 -- -- 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 16 ... 20 200 -- --
25 -- -- 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 20 ... 25 250 -- --
32 -- -- 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 25 ... 32 320 -- 160 ... 320
40 40 160 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 32 ... 40 400 -- 200 ... 400
50 50 200 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 40 ... 50 500 -- 250 ... 500
63 63 252 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 50 ... 63 630 -- 315 ... 630
80 80 320 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 63 ... 80 800 -- 400 ... 800
100 100 400 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 80 ... 100 1000 -- 500 ... 1000
125 125 500 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 -- -- -- 625 ... 1250
160 160 640 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 -- -- -- 800 ... 1600
Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 40 °C

Rated current 3VT17..-2EA46-0AA0 3VT17..-2EC46-0AA0 3VT17..-2EB46-0AA0
In Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection
Ii (instantaneous) Ii (instantaneous) Ii (instantaneous)
A A A A A A A
16 - -- 12,5 ... 16 160 ... 240 - -
20 - -- 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 - -
25 - -- 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 - -
32 - -- 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 - 160 ... 320
40 40 160 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 - 200 ... 400
50 50 200 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 - 250 ... 500
63 63 252 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 - 315 ... 630
80 80 320 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 - 400 ... 800
100 100 400 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 - 500 ... 1000
125 125 500 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 - 625 ... 1250
160 160 640 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 - 800 ... 1600
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/17

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
1 Characteristic "L", In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A Characteristic "D", In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
1.05 1.30 NSO0_00049 1.05 1.30 NSO0_00051
10000 10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 In = 40 … 160 A 5 In = 32 … 160 A
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
I I
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Characteristic "D", In = 16, 20, 25 A Characteristic "M", In = 16, 20, 25 A
1.05 1.30 NSO0_00050 1.00 1.20 NSO0_00052

10000 10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 In = 16 … 25 A 5 In = 16 … 25 A
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
I I
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
1/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Characteristic "M", In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 A 1
1.00 1.20 NSO0_00053
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
200
L
100
50
20
10
5 In = 32 … 100 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
I
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
Characteristic "N", In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
NSO0_00054
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5 In = 32 … 160 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
I
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/19

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
1 Trip units, with tripping characteristic M class
Rated current Article No. Class
The tripping time of the 3-pole trip unit of 3VT1 circuit breakers In
with characteristic M at 7.2 In corresponds to the tripping clas- 16 A 3VT1701-2DM36-0AA0 10A
ses 10A, 10 and 20 according to EN 60947-4-1. 20 A 3VT1702-2DM36-0AA0 10A
25 A 3VT1792-2DM36-0AA0 10A
32 A 3VT1703-2DM36-0AA0 10
40 A 3VT1704-2DM36-0AA0 10
IC01_00164
50 A 3VT1705-2DM36-0AA0 20
I
63 A 3VT1706-2DM36-0AA0 20
Plate of the trip units with characteristic M 80 A 3VT1708-2DM36-0AA0 20
100 A 3VT1710-2DM36-0AA0 20
Setting IR and Ii for circuit breakers with characteristic "D"

Adjusting IR Adjusting Ii
I201_18960
25°
90°
90°
90°
Connection of 3-/4-pole 3VT1 circuit breakers in DC circuits
Installation positions
DC DC
+ +
1 3 5 N 1 3 5
Q Q
NSO0_00582a
J
2 4 6 N 2 4 6
Load Load
Connection of 3P circuit breaker Connection of 4P circuit breaker

in DC circuit up to 250 V DC in DC circuit up to 440 V DC
1/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units, 4-pole version Circuit breakers with characteristic 1
Trip units are integrated into the 3VT1 circuit breakers. "L"
It is not possible to deinstall or exchange the trip units. L I
4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured in the following
versions:
t
• 3-pole +N (three poles protected, N-pole unprotected)
• 4-pole (all four poles protected)
The permissible load of the N-pole is 100% In.
Tripping characteristics
The circuit breakers are delivered with three types of tripping
characteristics, designated by the following letters:
"L" - lines
For protection of lines with low starting currents
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "L" have a fixed value
NSO0_00502
of rated current I (without In control). The circuit breakers feature
In values of standard current range 40 ... 160 A, see "Ranges of
trip units and their possible setting". The short-circuit trip unit has I
a fixed setting to 4 x In.
"D"
"D" - distribution L I
For protection of lines and transformers
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "D" can be set to a re- Ir
t
duced current in the range of approx. 0.75 ... 1 In.
The circuit breakers feature In values within a standard current
range of 16 ... 160 A.
Setting values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
"N" - short-circuit
For protection against short circuits only
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic "N" have a short circuit
Ii
trip unit only. They feature circuit breaker values within a stan-
dard current range of 32 ... 160 A. The short circuit trip unit is ad-
NSO0_00500
justable.
The values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
Article Numbers I
The article number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated cur- "N"
rent and on the tripping characteristics.
L I
For example: Protection of a circuit with In = 40 A.
The article number is 3VT1704-2EC46-0AA0.
t
Setting of tripping characteristics
• Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
(for circuit breakers with characteristics "D" and "M"). The time-
dependent trip unit for overload protection Ir (instantaneous),
is adjusted in a continuous range using the Ir adjustment dial
on the overload trip unit. The Ir adjustment range is 0.75 ... 1 In.
• Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit
trip unit) I Ii
(for circuit breakers with characteristics "D" and "N"). With a
time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short
NSO0_00216
circuit current Ii), adjustment is possible within a continuous

range.
All values are shown in the table on page 1/17. I
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/21

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
1 ■ Overview
Auxiliary switches Location of switches in accessory compartments
Auxiliary and alarm switches Location of accessory compartments in a 3-pole 3VT1

circuit breaker/switch disconnector.
Function, name and location of switches
Article No. Type Switch location Switch function

3VT9100-2AB10 Auxiliary Accessory Signals the condition
3VT9100-2AB20 switch compartment of the main contact
11), 2, 3, 4, 5, 62) of the circuit brea-
ker/ switch discon-
nector
3VT9100-2AH10 Alarm Accessory Signals whether the
3VT9100-2AH20 switch compartment 11) circuit breaker was
tripped by the trip
unit
1)
In accessory compartment 1, a 3VT9100-2AB10 auxiliary switch and
3VT9100-2AH10 alarm switch cannot be used simultaneously.
2)
When one of accessory compartments 4, 5 or 6 is already in use for auxili-
ary switches, a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit cannot be installed
additionally.
Location of accessory compartments in a 4-pole 3VT1

circuit breaker/switch disconnector.
When using one of the accessory compartments 4, 5 or 6,
neither a shunt trip unit nor an undervoltage trip unit can be ins-
talled.
1/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
■ Function 1
Switching states (4-pole) Switching states (3-pole)
Accessory compartment 1 ... 9 1 10 Accessory compartment 1 ... 6 1 10
Switching states of Switching states of
the circuit breaker the circuit-breaker
3VT9100-1UC/UD/UE..
3VT9100-1SC/SD/SE..
3VT9100-2AH10
3VT9100-2AH10
3VT9100-2AB10
3VT9100-2AB10
Position of the main contacts
Position of the main contacts
3VT9100-1U...
3VT9100-1S...
Lever position
Lever position
NSO0_00093
NSO0_00093
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1
Switched off manually 0 0 1 0 1 1 Switched off manually 0 0 1 0 1 1
Switched off by the trip 0 0 1 1 0 1 Switched off by the trip 0 0 1 1 0 1

unit or INSPECTION button unit or INSPECTION button
Switched off by auxiliary trip unit 0 0 1 0 1 0 Switched off by auxiliary trip unit 0 0 1 0 1 0
Switched off by TEST button 0 0 1 0 1 1

Switched off by TEST button 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed

■ Technical specifications
Article No. 3VT9100-2AB10, 3VT9100-2AB20,
3VT9100-2AH10 3VT9100-2AH20
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 250 V AC 5 ... 60 V
DC 60 ... 250 V DC 5 ... 60 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 kV
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current Ie/Ue
AC-12 6 A/250 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
AC-15 5 A/60 V, 3 A/110 V, 1.5 A/230 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
DC-12 0.25 A/250 V 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
DC-13 0.5 A/60 V, 0.2 A/110 V, 0.1 A/250 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
Thermal current Ith A 6A 0.5 A
Contacts arrangement 001
Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
(connected switch)
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/23

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary trip units
1 ■ Design
Auxiliary trip units The article number of the auxiliary trip unit depends on the rated
operational voltage
Ue Article No.
AC/DC 24/48 V 3VT9100-1SC00
AC 110/230 V, DC 110/220 V 3VT9100-1SD00
AC 230/400 V, DC 220 V 3VT9100-1SE00
DC 12 V 3VT9100-1SB00
Ue Article No.
AC/DC 24/48 V 3VT9100-1UC00
AC 110/230 V, DC 110/220 V 3VT9100-1UD00
AC 230/400 V, DC 220 V 3VT9100-1UE00
The specific rated operational voltage of the shunt trip unit is set
by jumpers located on the trip unit. The standard setting by the
manufacturer is always to the value corresponding to the article
number.
Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit
Schematics
Location of auxiliary trip unit
L+ L+
D1
C1
10.Y1
10.Y1
3VT9100-1U.0
3VT9100-1S.0
U U<
NSO0_00056a
NSO0_00055a
10.Y2
10.Y2
D2
C2
N- N-
Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit
One auxiliary trip unit can be installed in accessory compartment 10
Article No. 3VT9100-1S.00 Article No. 3VT9100-1U.00
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230/400 V Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230/400 V
DC 12/24/48/110/220 V DC 24/48/110/220 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Input power at 1.1 Ue Input power at 1.1 Ue
• AC 2 VA • AC 2 VA
• DC 2W • DC 2W
Characteristics U ≥ 0.7 Ue: circuit breaker must Characteristics U ≤ 0.35 Ue: circuit breaker must
trip trip
U ≥ 0.85 Ue: circuit breaker can be
switched on
Time before switching off 15 ms Time before switching off 15 ms
Continuous load yes Continuous load yes
Connection cross-section S 0,5 ... 1 mm2 Connector cross-section S 0.5 ... 1 mm2
Terminal protection IP20 Terminal protection IP20
(connected trip unit) (connected trip unit)
Location in accessory compartment no. 10 Location in accessory compartment no. 10
Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the shunt Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the
trip unit undervoltage trip unit
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 230 V Rated operational voltage Ue AC 230 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current Ie/Ue 2 A/AC 230 V Rated operational current Ie/Ue 2 A/AC 230 V
Thermal current Ith 6A Thermal current Ith 6A
Contact arrangement 01 Contact arrangement 01
1/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design 1
Rotary operating mechanisms Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
3VT9100-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
The rotary operating mechanism actuates the circuit brea- + 3VT9100-3HJ.. extension shaft
kers/switch disconnector when the operator turns the knob, e.g. + 3VT9100-3HG/HH.. coupling driver
in order to switch machines on and off. The modular concept of + 3VT9100-3HE/HF.. knob
the operating mechanism allows simple mounting on the circuit
breaker. Mounting can be done after having removed the acces-
sory compartment cover. An attached drive can be sealed (with
sealing wire). The drive and its accessories are ordered separa-
tely to match the requirements (see page 1/7).
• The rotary operating mechanism is mounted directly on the
circuit breaker or switch disconnector.
• The coupling driver is fixed to the switchgear cabinet door and
provides for degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
• The knob is mounted onto the rotary operating mechanism or
onto the coupling driver.
• The extension shaft is supplied in two versions, standard
(length 350 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjus-
table length 199 ... 352 mm). It is fitted onto the rotary opera-
ting mechanism.
The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the
circuit breaker:
Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. 1) Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver
3VT9100-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism and knob
+ 3VT9100-3HE/HF.. knob
Operation through the side wall of the switchgear cabinet (Fig. 3)
in left- or right-side designs of rotary operating mechanisms for
lateral operation
3VT9100-3HD10 (right) or 3VT9 100-3HC10 (left)
+ 3VT9100-3HJ.. extension shaft
+ 3VT9100-3HG/HH.. coupling driver
+ 3VT9100-3HE/HF.. knob.
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob

Fig. 3: Lateral rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling
driver and knob
Enhanced safety for operator
• The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to
lock the circuit breaker into the "switched off manually" posi-
tion. The rotary operating mechanism and lever can be locked
with up to three padlocks with a shaft diameter up to 4 mm.
• Every coupling driver prevents the switchgear cabinet door
from opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or if it
was tripped. By means of the coupling driver it is possible to
switch off this locking and to open the door.
Locking of the switchgear cabinet door is also possible in the
OFF mode of the circuit breaker. It is necessary to activate the
locking by means of the knob on the coupling drive and to lock
the hand drive arm.
• Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can also
be provided with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or me-
chanical parallel switching (see page 1/27).
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/25

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Features
Article No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length
lock the circuit brea- Protection when circuit breaker is mm
ker in OFF mode
switched on switched off
manually
and locked
3VT9100-3HA10 Rotary operating mechanism gray no -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HA20 Rotary operating mechanism gray yes -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HB20 Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HC10 Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, gray no -- - -- --
left
3VT9100-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, gray no -- - -- --
right
3VT9100-3HE10 Knob black no -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HE20 Knob, lockable with padlock black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HF20 Knob, lockable with padlock red yes -- -- -- --
3VT9100-3HG10 Coupling driver black -- IP40 yes yes --
3VT9100-3HH10 Coupling driver yellow -- IP40 yes yes --
3VT9100-3HJ10 Extension shaft (can be shortened) -- -- -- -- -- 350
3VT9100-3HJ20 Extension shaft, telescopic -- -- -- -- -- 199 ... 352
1/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Mechanical interlockig and mechanical interlocking for parallel switching 1
3VT9100-8LA00 mechanical interlocking 3VT9100-8LB00 mechanical interlocking for parallel switching
Mechanical interlocking make sure that two circuit breakers can- Mechanical interlocking for parallel switching are for simultane-
not trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit ous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can used between two 3VT1 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker
be used between two 3VT1 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism and at
must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism – at least least one of them with a knob (see page 1/25).
one of them with a rotary operating mechanism and a knob (see
page 1/25). When using a mechanical interlocking for parallel switching it is
required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and
When using a mechanical interlocking it is required to comply in the table.
with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table.
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm
X 87.5 or 100 X 75 or 87.5 or 100
L 94.5 or 106 L to be determined
X
X
NSO0_00058
NSO0_00057
Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with
3VT9100-8LA00 mechanical interlocking 3VT9100-8LB00 mechanical interlocking for parallel switching
NSO0_00060
NSO0_00059
12.5 or 25 0 or 12.5 or 25
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/27

© Siemens AG 2014

1 ■ Design
Motorized operating mechanism Lateral operating mechanisms can be locked in "off position" of
the circuit breaker by up to three padlocks with a shank diameter
The motorized operating mechanism is an accessory to the cir- of max. 4 mm. The protective cover of the operating mecha-
cuit breaker/switch disconnector, by means of which it is possi- nisms can also be sealed.
ble to switch the circuit breaker or switch disconnector remotely
on and off. The modular design of the motorized operating me- Motorized operating mechanism automatic operation presets
chanism enables its simple attachment to the circuit breaker
(also in addition to a rotary operating mechanism). The moto- The position of the main circuit breaker is indicated by the
rized operating mechanism is used for both remote and local position of the circuit breaker driver lever under the transparent
control of 3VT1 3-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers. The circuit protective cover of the operating mechanism. The wound up po-
breaker with attached motorized operating mechanism can be sition of the circuit breaker can also be signalled remotely.
installed on a mounting plate or on a standard DIN mounting rail. In the remote control mode, the circuit breaker is switched on
The motorized operating mechanism is fastened by means of a and off by an ON and OFF pushbutton. The accessories for the
bayonet mechanism to the circuit breaker. motorized operating mechanism includes an 3VT9100-3MF00
3VT1 circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism are extension cable.
intended for industrial, power engineering and infrastructure ap-
plications. The motorized operating mechanisms are for direct
actuation of the circuit breaker, without a spring storage unit. Symbol Description
The motorized operating mechanism can work in local or remote Switched on manually or by motorized operating
mechanism electrically
control mode. The local control mode is used, for instance, in
case of loss of the control voltage. Local control of the circuit
breaker is only accessible after lifting the transparent safety co- Switched off by trip unit, shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip
ver off the operating mechanism. This procedure locks the re- unit or TEST pushbutton
mote electrical control circuits. The lifted position of the cover
can be indicated remotely. Switched off manually or by motorized operating mecha-
nism electrically, wound up state
The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the
control lever. After returning the safety cover to the original posi-
tion, the operating mechanism is switched automatically into the
remote control mode.
After the safety cover was removed, it is possible to actuate an
automatic mode selector switch. Under the transparent cover,
there is a red LED. The lighting of the LED indicates a failure
(failed on/off/wind-up operations).
Electronic circuits of the motorized operating mechanism block
erroneous control process, e.g. drive cycling after tripping of trip NSO0_00546
unit or shunt trip/undervoltage trip unit.
Switch Automatic Preset

position operation preset description
Circuit breaker switching off to Circuit breaker will be swit- Circuit breaker will be switched
TRIP position ched to OFF position to ON position
11) Automatic winding up is By trip unit The motorized operating The motorized operating
0 N on mechanism switches the cir- mechanism switches circuit
By auxiliary trip unit
cuit breaker OFF automati- breaker on when it receives an
By TEST pushbutton cally. ON signal.
1 2
2 Automatic winding up is The motorized operating The motorized operating
0 N off mechanism stays in TRIP mechanism switches circuit
mode until it receives an OFF breaker on when it receives an
signal. ON signal.
1 2
3 Simultaneous winding When receiving an ON signal the motorized operating mecha-
0 N up and switching on nism switches the circuit breaker off and on again immediately.
2)
1 2
The motorized operating mechanism is out of operation, the red LED is lit.
0 N
1 2
1) Standard factory setting of the switch.
2) Pressing the OFF pushbutton causes the motorized operating mechanism
to wind up the circuit breaker to position only.
1/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Schematics 1
MP control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
B
Motor drive
X3 4 3 1
M P
MP
2 5 6 7 8
X3
B
NSO0_00061a
HL1 HL2 HL3 HL4

N-
MP control circuit, signaling
Explanation of designations
Article No. 3VT9100-3M.00
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230 V MP 3VT9100-3M.00 motorized operating mecha-
DC 24/48/110/220 V nism
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz M Motor
Control pulse length P Gearbox
for switching on 60 ms ... ∞1) X3 Connector for connection of control and signal-
for switching off 60 ms ... ∞1) ling circuits
Time for switching on < 70 ms 1)
B recommended connection of control circuits-
Time for switching off < 50 ms1) not part of MP
Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 5 cycles/min ON Pushbutton
Frequency of cycles-successive ON/OFF 10 cycles OFF Pushbutton
Mechanical endurance 20000 cycles Q3 motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
Power input AC 100 VA HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable making or
breaking), permissible load max. 10 W2)
DC 100 W
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever "wound up"
Starting current 12 A, at AC/DC 24 V position, permissible load max. 10 W2)
6 A, at AC/DC 48 V
4 A, at AC/DC 110 V HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of
2 A, at AC 230 V/DC 220 V the operating mechanism, permissible load
max. 10 W2)
Protection
AC 24/48/110 V; AC 230 V 5SX4104-7; 5SX4102-7 HL4 signalling of extension of the operating mecha-
DC 24/48/110 V; DC 220 V 5SX5104-7; 5SX5102-7 nism locking bar, permissible load max. 10 W2)
Article No. 3VT9100-3MF00 2) Voltage on terminals 5, 6, 7, 8 is the same as Un of the motorized operating
Number of conductors 8 mechanism.
Conductor cross section S 0.35 mm2
Conductor length 60 cm
1)
The values depend on the motorized operating mechanism automatic ope-
ration preset, see pages 1/30 ff.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/29

© Siemens AG 2014

1 3VT1 circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
(OFF signal) (ON signal).
Automatic operation presets no. 1, 2, 3 Automatic operation presets no. 1, 2, 3
NSO0_00062
NSO0_00063
Main contacts Main contacts
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact Auxiliary switch - NO contact
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NC contact Auxiliary switch - NC contact
55 65
1 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Recommended pulse durations for electrical switching

Automatic operation no. 1 Graph description
NSO0_00064
> 520 > 520 Symbol Description

>20 > 20 HK Main contacts
60 … 500 60 … 500
1
IMP OFF IMP ON NS Alarm switch
0
IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
50 < 70 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
HK 1
Switched on
0
NS 1 Switched off manually or electrically by motorized opera-

0 ting mechanism (wound up state)
t [ms]
Automatic operation no. 2

NSO0_00065
> 520 > 520

>20 > 20
60 … ∞ 60 … ∞
1
0 IMP OFF IMP ON
50 < 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00066
> 520 > 520

> 20 > 20
60 … 500 60 … 500
1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0
50 < 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
1/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Circuit breaker switches off by
trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton
Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker
with motorized operating mechanism after it was switched off
1
by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton
NSO0_00067
NSO0_00069
Main contacts
> 15001)
2 1 10 60 … 500
4 3 1 1
6 5 IMP ON
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact
compartment
10 70
accessory
1 1
3.4 3.3 HK
0
3
0
Auxiliary switch - NC contact
15 1070
1 NS 1
3.2 3.1
0 0
Alarm switch - NO contact
t [ms]
compartment
10 1080
accessory
1
2.4 2.3 Automatic operation no. 2
0
2
Alarm switch - NC contact
NSO0_00070
> 500
5 1085
1 60 … ∞ > 20 60 … ∞
2.2 2.1 1
0 IMP OFF IMP ON
t [ms] 0
1) 70
Automatic operation no. 2 1
HK
0
NSO0_00068
Main contacts 70
NS 1
2 1 10
4 3
1 0
6 5 0 t [ms]
compartment
10 Automatic operation no. 3

accessory
NSO0_00071
3.4 3.3 0
3

15 60 … 500
1 1 IMP ON
3.2 3.1 0 0
Alarm switch - No contact
1) 140
compartment
10
accessory
1 HK 1
2.4 2.3 0 0
2

70
5 NS 1
1
2.2 2.1 0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
1) If the circuit breaker was switched off by a trip unit, it is necessary to
Automatic operation no. 3 remove the error before it switches on again.
Graph description
NSO0_00068
Main contacts Symbol Description

2 1 10 HK Main contacts
4 3
1
6 5
NS Alarm switch
0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
compartment
10 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism

accessory
1 Switched on
3.4 3.3 0
3

15 Switched off by trip units, TEST or INSPECTION pushbut-
1 ton
3.2 3.1 0
Alarm switch - No contact
Switched off manually or electrically by motorized opera-
compartment
10 ting mechanism (wound-up state)

accessory
1
2.4 2.3 0
2
5
1
2.2 2.1 0
t [ms]
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/31

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Circuit breaker switches off by
shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip unit or TEST pushbutton
Automatic operation no. 1 Reaction time of the shunt trip
NSO0_00072a
Main contacts
1
2 1 15
4 3 1 0
6 5 >50
NSO0_00583
0
1
compartment
15 OK
accessory
1 0
3.4 3.3 t [ms]
0
3
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory
Alarm switch Auxiliary trip unit
compart-
ment
2
10 1085
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00073a
Main contacts
2 1 15
4 3 1
6 5
0
compartment
accessory
15
1
3.4 3.3
3
0
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory

compart-
ment
2
10
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00073a
Main contacts
2 1 15
4 3 1
6 5
0
compartment
accessory
15
1
3.4 3.3
3
0
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory

compart-
ment
2
10
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]

1/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker
with motorized operating mechanism
Graph description 1
after it was switched off by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton Symbol Description
HK Main contacts
NS Alarm switch
SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
NSO0_00074
> 1500 SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
60 … 500
1 IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
IMP ON
0 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
Switched on
> 2001)
1
SV
0 Switched off by trip units, TEST or INSPECTION pushbut-
tons
> 2001)
SP 1
Switched off manually or by electrically by motorized
0 operating mechanism (wound up state)
15 1070 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
Automatic operation no.2

NSO0_00075
> 500
> 20
60 … ∞ 60 … ∞
1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0
> 2001)
1
SV
0
> 2001)
SP 1
0
15 70
70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00076
> 500
60 … 500
1
IMP ON
0
> 2001)
1
SV
0
> 2001) 140

SP 1
0
15 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
1)
Re-switching is only possible after deactivation of the shunt trip unit or
undervoltage trip unit.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/33

© Siemens AG 2014

Insulating barriers and terminal covers
1 ■ Overview
3-pole version Fixed-mounted version
H
• Front connection
- Terminals 1, 3, 5
3VT9100-8CE30 insulating barriers or 3VT9100-8CA30 ter-
minal covers have to be used (when using 3VT9100-4TF30
connection sets for connecting circuit breakers/switch dis-
connectors, the terminal cover is included in the connecting
set).
- Terminals 2, 4, 6
3VT9100-8CE30 insulating barriers or 3VT9100-8CA30 ter-
minal covers have to be used (when using 3VT9100-4TF30
>15
connection sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch dis-

connector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting
set).
• Rear connection
- Insulating barriers and covers need not be used.
Reference Size
mm
A 50 Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars
or with rear connection)
A1 100 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers from 50 mm to max.
100 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the con-
ductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 150 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsu-
lated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conduc-
tors and busbars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors situ-
NSO0_00551
ated vertically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit
breakers/switch disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, Minimum distance between the circuit
G breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
H 30 Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
Deionization of the arc space
H = 30 1 1
1 3VT9100-8CE30
A2 = 150
A1 = 100
100
A = 50
F=0 G=0 Un ≤ 415 V AC
ON ON ON
130
OFF OFF OFF

TEST TEST TEST
NSO0_00012a
D=
20
C = 20 E = 70 G = 40 Un > 415 V AC
75 75 100 C = 20
1/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

4-pole version Fixed-mounted version 1
H • Front connection
- terminals N, 1, 3, 5
3VT9100-8CE30 and 3VT9100-8CE00 insulating barriers or
3VT9100-8CA40 terminal covers have to be used
(if 3VT9100-4TF40 connecting sets are used to connect the
circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is
included in the connecting set)
- Terminals N, 2, 4, 6
3VT9100-8CE30 and 3VT9100-8CE00 insulating barriers or
>15
3VT9100-8CA40 terminal covers have to be used
(if 3VT9100-4TF40 connecting sets are used to connect the
circuit breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is
included in the connecting set)
• Rear connection
- Insulating barriers or covers need not be used.
Reference Size
mm
A 50 Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connection by means of insulated conductors, cables, fle-
xibars or rear connection)
A1 100 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9100-8CE30 and 3VT9100-8CE00 insulating barriers
from 50 mm to max. 100 mm, or by means of additional
insulating of conductors over the barriers at least to the
value of A1)
A2 150 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsu-
lated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conduc-
tors and busbars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and a bus-
bar
• between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors ins-
NSO0_00552 talled vertically one above the other
• between uninsulated leads of two circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors
C, D, E, F, Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch discon-
G nector and uninsulated earthed wall
H 30 Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
Deionization of the arc space
H = 30 1 1
1 3VT9100-8CE30
A2 = 150
A1 = 100
100
A = 50
F=0 G=0 Un ≤ 415 V AC
ON ON ON
130
OFF OFF OFF

TEST TEST TEST
NSO0_00012a
D=
20
C = 20 E = 70 G = 40 Un > 415 V AC
75 75 100 C = 20

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/35
© Siemens AG 2014

1 ■ Overview
• Designed to protect against leakage/residual current • Module can be connected directly by means of Cu/AI cable
• Accessories for circuit breakers - simple mounting on left side max.95 mm2
of the device • For other connection standard terminals with the exception of
• Can be mounted on DIN rail by means of adapter rear connection can be used
• Can be connected with the circuit breaker by interconnecting • LED to indicate device operation
busbars or by standard cable • LED signals 50% IΔn
- Version without interconnecting busbars (they are not a part • Remote signalling of 50% IΔn by means of make contact
of module)
- interconnecting busbars can be bought separately • Remote signalling of circuit breaker switched off based on IΔn
- can be connected to the circuit breaker by a cable, (cable is level by means of break contact in shunt trip
not part of the module) • Mechanism for disconnection of electronic parts of module
• The circuit breaker is switched off by special shunt trip, that is from voltage-disconnection has to be done before the insula-
part of the residual current module tion resistance test is effected
• Design according to nominal current: • TEST push button - complete test of the device by means of
- Version up to 160 A for circuit breakers from 80 up to 160 A simulation of real residual current
• Design according to the parameters setting: • Circuit breaker can not be assembled by another shunt trip or
- Version with fixed residual current IΔn =300mA, without delay undervoltage release
- Design with gradual setting of residual current IΔn and with • Two circuit breakers with residual current module can be as-
setting of ultimate no action time of tΔn (see table) sembled neither by mechanical interlocking nor by parallel
- When there is set IΔn = 0.03 A the delay is always 0 s! switching
• Setting can be sealed
Type 3VT9116-5GA40 3VT9116-5GB40
Weight 1.3 kg
Standards EN 60947-2, IEC 947-2
Type A
Number of poles 4
Rated current In 160 A
Rated residual current IΔn 0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0; 3 A 0.3 - fixed
Maximum inactivity time tΔn 0; 0.1; 0.2; 0.3; 0.5; 1.0 s 0 - without delay
Rated voltage Un 440 V a.c.
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 80 ... 440 V
Rated impulse voltage Uimp 6 kV
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Losses per 1 pole 4W
Mechanical/electrical endurance 80000 cycles
Method of mounting side
Installation of DIN rail ✓
Use circuit breaker 3VT1
Reference temperature 40°C
Ambient temperature range -40 ... +55°C
Pollution degree 3
Max. sea level 2000 m
Seismic resistance 3g (8 ... 50) Hz
Accessories
Connecting sets have to be bought separately ✓

1/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Signal contact specifications 1
Signalling switch of switch off by a
failure
Rated operational voltage Ue 230 V a.c.
Rated insulating voltage Ui 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Rated operating current Ie/Ue 2 A/230 V AC
Thermal current Ith 6A
Arrangement of contacts 01
Signalling switch of meeting the
value of 50% IΔn
Rated operational voltage Ue 250 V a.c./30 V d.c.
Rated insulating voltage Ui 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6 kV
Rated operating current AC 5 A/250 V
DC 5 A/30 V
Thermal current Ith 5A
■ Schematics
Shunt trip Main circuit Residual current device
C1
Y1
10.Y 1
X1
N 1 3 5 N 1 3 5
TEST RCD
F2 TEST
S1
S2 Q E
V
10
DT
T
I201_18920
10.Y 2
J INSPECTION RCD
X2
Y2
C2
N 2 4 6 N 2 4 6
Explanations Maximum total time shutdown

J 3VT1 circuit breaker Time limit - configured value
RCD residual current device 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 500 ms 1000 ms
Q main contacts 1 x IΔn <70 ms <230 ms <350 ms <440 ms <630 ms <1200 ms
V trip-free mechanism 2 x IΔn <40 ms <200 ms <320 ms <430 ms <620 ms <1200 ms
T thermomagnetic overcurrent relaese 5 x IΔn <40 ms <210 ms <310 ms <420 ms <630 ms <1200 ms
E electronic of residual current device
TEST pushbutton to test release
MINITEST inspection push button of release
TEST RCD button of residual current module
S1 signalling of 50% residual current value
S2 signalling switch of switch off by a failure
F2 shunt trip
DT disconnection of residual current module from voltage
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/37

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Connection and mounting
Reduction of rated current of circuit breaker according to the type of connection
1
Circuit breaker1) Rated current Connection bet- Inlet/outlet cables Reduction Adjusted current Ir Real current Irt (t=40°C)4) Figure
of the circuit ween circuit breaker coefficient: k3) Irt = In x k
breaker In and RCD
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 3VT911.-5GY.. Cu, 70 mm2 5) 0.9 160 A 144 A (160x0.90) 1
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 3VT911.-5GY.. Cu, 70 mm2 5) 0.9 125 A 112.5 A (125x0.90) 1
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 3VT911.-5GY.. Cu, 95mm2 5) 1 160 A 160 A 1
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 160 3VT911.-5GY.. Cu, 95mm2 5) 1 125 A 125 A 1
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 Cu, 70 mm2 5) 1 160 A 160 A 2
3VT1716-2...6-0AA0 cable S = 95 mm2 6) Cu, 70 mm2 5) 1 125 A 125 A 2
1) For other circuit breaker is reduction coefficient k = 1 4) dependency of nominal current In on ambient conditions can be found in
2) Connecting sets can be mounted on both upper/lower terminals the catalogue
5) length of cables 2 m is given by standard EN 60947-1
3) coefficients k are not dependent on ambient temperature
6) cables length 0.5 up to 1 m
1
I201_18961
Cu, S = 95 mm, l = 0,5 ... 1 m2
N 1 2 3 N 1 2 3
I201_18963
N 1 2 3 N 1 2 3
Cu, S = 95 mm, l = 0,5 ... 1 m2

N 1 2 3
N 1 2 3
Cu, S = 95 mm, l = 0,5 ... 1 m2

1/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance
Dimensional drawings
■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, fixed-mounted version 1

Fixed-mounted version, front connection
98
68.5
Ø 6.4
18 20 2
12 1.5
7
2°
13° 14°
ON 38
100
130
118
111
100
93
45
OFF
TEST
63
R5 4xØ4
NSO0_00018
40.5
4.6
15
25 25 20 25 25
75 70
80
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9100-4TF30 connecting set)

25 25
25
ON
168
136
100
154
186
202
220
111
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00020
75 2 x Ø 16.2
31 20
68.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/39

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9100-4ED30 connecting set)
Ø 10.5
22 4
25
ON
100
130
183
111
100
OFF
TEST
75 4xØ4
NSO0_00026
15
25 25
36.5
10
20 20
25
37.5 37.5
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (3VT9100-4RC30 connecting set)
5.5
25 25 25 25
3
42
Ø
Ø 13.2
87
15
25
25
ON
100
100
130
111
OFF
TEST
80 2xØ4
NSO0_00023
Ø 6.4 35
12
75 70
2
9.5
1/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism 1
1
75
NSO0_00029
1 3VT1
2 2 3VT9100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3 3 3VT9100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
TEST
63
°
90
98 29
27.5 45°
Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob

1
75
NSO0_00031
1 3VT1
6 2 3VT9100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
2
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
45 3 4 4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
22,5
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
6 Outside surface of
45
22,5
cabinet door
TEST
63
°
90
98
27,5 45° 124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)
Dimensions of door cut-out

min.50
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
NSO0_00553
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/41

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right
NSO0_00035a
1 3VT1
2 6 2 3VT9100-3HD10
9 0°
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
45°
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
TEST
63
3
4
1
26.6 50 114.5
45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left
75
NSO0_00036
1 3VT1
6 2 2 3VT9100-3HC10
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
cabinet door
45°
TEST
63
3
4
°
1 90
49.9 46.6 114.5

65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
NSO0_00554
Fixed-mounted version, installation on standard DIN mounting rail (width 35 mm )

86
67
ON
130
45
OFF
TEST
40.5
NSO0_00043
2.7
2
72
82
1/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism 1
130
150
NSO0_00555
94.4
80
45
40.5
70 NSO0_00556
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/43

© Siemens AG 2014

1 ■ Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, fixed-mounted version
98 68.5
18 20 2
12 Ø 6.4 1.5
7
2°
13° 14°
ON 38
100
130
118
111
100
93
45
OFF
TEST
63
R5 M3
NSO0_00014
40.5
4.6
15
25 25 25 20 50 25
100 70
80
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9100-4TF40 connecting set )
5.5
25 25 25 25 25 25
3
42
Ø
Ø 13.2
87 25
15
25
ON
100
100
111
OFF
TEST
80 M3
NSO0_00016
Ø 6.4 35
12
100 70
2
9.5

25 25 25 25 25 25
5.5
3
ø13.2
42 ø1
25 5 25
87
111
130
100
130
100
111
80
ø6
12
35
.4
M
3
NSO0_00557
9.5
70
100 NSO0_00559
2
1/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism 1
100 1
75
NSO0_00028
1 3VT1
2 2 3VT9100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3 3 3VT9100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
TEST
63
°
90
98 29
45°
52.5
Fixed version, front rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob

1
100
NSO0_00525
1 3VT1
6 2 3VT9100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
2
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
3 4
45 4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
22.5
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
22.5
cabinet door
63
°
90
98
45° 124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
52.5
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)

min.50
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
NSO0 00553
Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right
100
1 3VT1
2 6 2 3VT9100-3HD10
9 0°
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
45°
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
TEST
63
3
NSO0_00032
4
1
62.5 26.6 49.9 114.5

45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/45

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left
100
NSO0_00033a
1 3VT1
6 2 2 3VT9100-3HC10
5 3 3VT9100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
5 3VT9100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
cabinet door
45°
TEST
63
3
4
°
1 90
49.9 46.6 37.5 114.5

65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
Fixed-mounted version, installation on a standard DIN mounting rail (width 35 mm )

86
67
ON
130
45
OFF
TEST
40.5
NSO0_00038
2.7
2
72
82
Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with 3VT9100-8LA00 mechanical interlocking
TEST
NSO0_00039
148.2
1/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with 3VT9100-8LB00 mechanical interlocking for parallel switching 1
NSO0_00041
148.2
Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism

130
TEST
NSO0_00044
175
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 1/47

© Siemens AG 2014

1 Fixed design, Residual current device, rear connection
Drilling diagram
100 100
25 25 25 25 25 25 80
100
130
130
45
181,5
3
M
40,5
I201_18972
15
25 25 25
200 30 51,5
70
80
Fixed design, Residual current device,bottom connection
100 100
25 25 25 25 25 25 80 130
130
45
173
40,5
I201_18981
43
200 5,8
42,7
70
80
1/48 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

2
© Siemens AG 2014

up to 250 A

up to 250 A
2/2 General data
2/5 Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
2/6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism
2/10 Further accessories

up to 250 A
2/16 Trip units
2/31 Mechanical interlocking and
parallel switching
2/38 Mounting accessories for plug-in version
2/41 Mounting accessories for withdrawable
version
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 Switching unit
10
11
12
13 3
2
Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices

14 1
15 20 21 22
16
18 19 23 24 25 26
Accessories
NSO0_00164b
17 27 28 29 30 31
1 Molded case circuit breaker 11 Auxiliary conductor terminal 22 Coding set

2 Plug-in device 12 Rotary operating mechanism 23 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
3 Withdrawable device 13 Lateral rotary operating mechanism 24 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
4 Box terminals 14 Mechanical parallel switching 25 Auxiliary switch, change-over contact
5 Circular conductor terminal 15 Mechanical interlocking 26 Auxiliary switch, early, leading
6 Circular conductor terminal 16 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire contact
7 Multiple feed-in terminal 17 Motor operating mechanism 27 Lockingtype lever
8 Multiple feed-in terminal 18 Shunt trip unit 28 Sealing inset
9 Rear connection 19 Undervoltage trip unit 29 Additional cover for
10 Front connection 20 Connecting cable overcurrent releases
30 Terminal cover
21 Position signalling
31 Insulating barriers
2/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
■ Overview
Switching unit Circuit breaker
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3- or 4-pole switching unit and
• Two connecting sets (front connection terminals), a trip unit which is available with a choice of different characte-
3VT9200-4TA30 – for connecting busbars or cable lugs ristics.
• Insulating barriers
• A set of 4 installation bolts (M4 x 35) Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker)
or a switch disconnector unit (switch disconnector).
The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a
switch disconnector unit. 2
For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in ac-
cordance with the ambient temperature, see page 2/11.
For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexi-
bars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see
page 2/11.

Rated current In Breaking capacity Icu DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
(AC 415 V) P. unit per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
3-pole version
250 36 3VT2725-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 3.314
250 65 3VT2725-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 3.330
4-pole version, unprotected N
250 36 3VT2725-2AA46-0AA0 1 unit 4.100
250 65 3VT2725-3AA46-0AA0 1 unit 4.100
4-pole version, protected N
250 36 3VT2725-2AA56-0AA0 1 unit 4.100
250 65 3VT2725-3AA56-0AA0 1 unit 4.100

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/3
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Selection and ordering data for accessories

Rated current Current setting of S function short- Operating cur- DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
In the inverse- time circuit protec- rent of the ins- P. unit per PU
delayed overcur- tion (short-time tantaneous approx.
rent releases"L" delayed) "S" Isd short-circuit
IR releases"i"
Ii
A A kg
2 Electronic trip units (ETU)

Line protection, ETU LP, LI function1)
with fixed overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit
160 160 640 A 3VT9216-6AB00 1 unit 0.267
200 200 800 A 3VT9220-6AB00 1 unit 0.283
250 250 1000 A 3VT9225-6AB00 1 unit 0.283
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function1)
with adjustable thermal overload trip unit,
100 40 ... 100 4 X IR / 8 X IR 3VT9210-6AC00 1 unit 0.283
160 63 ... 160 4 X IR / 8 X IR 3VT9216-6AC00 1 unit 0.284
250 100 ... 250 4 X IR / 8 X IR 3VT9225-6AC00 1 unit 0.235
Distribution protection with N-pole protection,
ETU DPN, LIN function2)
100 40 ... 100 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9210-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
160 63 ... 160 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9216-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
250 100 ... 250 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9225-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function1)
100 40 ... 100 125 ... 1500 A 3VT9210-6AP00 1 unit 0.285
160 63 ... 160 200 ... 2400 A 3VT9216-6AP00 1 unit 0.284
250 100 ... 250 350 ... 2500 A 3VT9225-6AP00 1 unit 0.273
Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function1)
100 40 ... 100 3 ... 9 x IR 2500 A 3VT9210-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
160 63 ... 160 3 ... 9 x IR 2500 A 3VT9216-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
250 100 ... 250 3 ... 9 x IR 2500 A 3VT9225-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
Switch disconnector unit
250 3VT9225-6DT00 1 unit 0.219
Switch disconnector unit1)
For a description of trip units, see page 2/16.

1)
Only for switching units 3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0
2)
Only for switching unit 3VT2725-.AA56-0AA0

2/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Circuit breaker; Switch disconnector
■ Overview
The circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• shunt trip units, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• undervoltage trip units. when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-

P. unit per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz/DC kg
Auxiliary switches
with single NO contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AC10 1 unit 0.035
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AC20 1 unit 0.036
with single NC contacts

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AD10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AD20 1 unit 0.013
with double contacts (2 x NC)

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AE10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AE20 1 unit 0.038
with double contacts (NO and NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AF10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AF20 1 unit 0.038
with double contacts (2 x NO)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AG10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AG20 1 unit 0.038
with change-over contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V 3VT9300-2AH10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AH20 1 unit 0.013
with leading contacts (early)

AC 250 V 3VT9300-2AJ00 1 unit 0.040
Shunt trip units

DC 12 V 3VT9300-1SB00 1 unit 0.149
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1SC00 1 unit 0.140
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1SD00 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1SE00 1 unit 0.154

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1UC00 1 unit 0.151
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1UD00 1 unit 0.110
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1UE00 1 unit 0.110
with leading contact (early)1)
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1UC10 1 unit 0.120
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1UD10 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1UE10 1 unit 0.120
1)
Not to be used with 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism.

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/5
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanisms - 3VT9200-3HC10 for left side operation OR
- 3VT9200-3HD10 for right side operation
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the - 3VT9300-3HJ..extension shaft
following components: - 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: operating mechanism
- 3VT9200-3HA.0 or 3VT9200-3HB.0 for frontside operation - 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20 black knob or
2 - 3VT9300-3HF20 red knob
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door:
• Mechanical interlocking for fixed-mounted version must be
- 3VT9200-3HA.0 or 3VT9200-3HB.0 for frontside operation combined from the following parts:
- 3VT9300-3HJ..extension shaft - 2 x 3VT9200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling - 2 x 3VT9200-3HE/HF.. knob or
operating mechanism - 1 x 3VT9200-3HE/HF.. knob for parallel switching
- 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob • Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-
• For operation through side wall of cabinet: mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
• lockable with padlock yellow label 3VT9200-3HB20 1 unit 0.223

• mounted on the left side,
• not lockable

• mounted on the right side,
• not lockable
Knobs for rotary operating mechanism


To be used with the
3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20
black knob
• degree of protection IP40 (switchboard door black 3VT9300-3HG30 1 unit 0.211
opening with the circuit breaker switched on)
Additionally requires 3VT9300-3HF20 red knob
• degree of protection IP40 (switchboard door yellow 3VT9300-3HH30 1 unit 0.209
Extension shaft,
length 365 mm, may be shortened 3VT9300-3HJ10 1 unit 0.205
Extension shaft, telescopic, 3VT9300-3HJ20 1 unit 0.255

length 245 ... 410 mm

2/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Version DT Article No. PS*/ Weight

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
for fixed-mounted version only
The mechanical interlocking additionally requires the following parts:
• 2 x 3VT9200-3HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms,
• 2 x 3VT9300-3HE../HF.. knobs 2
The mechanical interlocking additionally requires the following parts:
• 1 x 3VT9300-3HE../HF.. knobs
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wires
• for two 3VT2 circuit breakers 3VT9200-8LC10 1 unit 0.393
• for one 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker 3VT9300-8LC20 1 unit 0.393
Motorized operating mechanism with storage spring

Degree of protection IP00,
with locking device for 3 padlocks
AC/DC 24 V 3VT9200-3MJ00 1 unit 1.529
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9200-3ML00 1 unit 1.529
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9200-3MN00 1 unit 1.529
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9200-3MQ00 1 unit 1.564
with operations counter
AC/DC 24 V 3VT9200-3MJ10 1 unit 1.546
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9200-3ML10 1 unit 1.546
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9200-3MN10 1 unit 1.546
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9200-3MQ10 1 unit 1.546
Accessories for motorized operating mechanism
Operations counter with cable, 3VT9300-3MF10 1 unit 0.003
length 110 cm
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, 3VT9300-3MF00 1 unit 0.060

12 wires, length 60 cm

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/7
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Plug-in version base Withdrawable version base
• The plug-in base includes: In the withdrawable version base the circuit breaker is fixed by
- Complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ side racks, therefore screws are not necessary. Changing of cir-
switch disconnectors in plug-in version. cuit breaker is faster as compared to plug-in version.
- A set of four installation bolts (M4 x 40) for fixing the switch-
ing unit to the plug-in base. • The withdrawable version base includes complete accesso-
ries for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in
2 3VT9200-4TA30 connecting sets are intended for connecting the
plug-in base with busbars or cable lugs. These connecting sets
withdrawable version.
• The circuit breaker located inside the withdrawable version
are included in the scope of supply of the 3-pole base can be moved between an operating position (ON-OFF)
3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 or 4-pole 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching and a checking position (withdrawn).
units.
Other connecting sets are also available.

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Plug-in base
3-pole version 3VT9200-4PA30 1 unit 1.766
Withdrawable version base

same as plug-in base, but with additional side panels and racks
3-pole version 3VT9200-4WA30 1 unit 3.497

2/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014


Version Conductor Type of DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
cross-section S connection P. unit per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Connecting sets for 3-pole version
Box terminals
1 set = 3 units
16 ... 150 Cu cables,
flexibars
3VT9200-4TC30 1 unit 0.240
2
Terminals for 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9215-4TD30 1 unit 0.200
circular conductors
1 set = 3 units
150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9224-4TD30 1 unit 0.339
Terminals for circular conductors

for enhancing termination point protection to IP20
use the 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal cover
1 set = 3 units 2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9215-4TF30 1 unit 0.520
2 x 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9224-4TF30 1 unit 0.630
Terminals for 6 x 6 ... 35 Cu/Al cables 3VT9203-4TF30 1 unit 0.300
circular conductors,
for 6 cables
1 set = 3 units
Terminals for rear connection Cu/Al busbars 3VT9200-4RC30 1 unit 0.250
Terminals for front connection Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9200-4TA30 1 unit 0.120

1 set = 3 units cable lugs,
flexibars
Included in every supply of switching units
4 ... 6 conductors
Front connection bars

increases pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars 3VT9200-4ED30 1 unit 0.303
flexibars
increases pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars 3VT9200-4EE30 1 unit 0.447
flexibars
Single terminals for 3- or 4-pole versions

Box terminal 16 ... 150 Cu cables, 3VT9200-4TC00 1 unit 0.320
1 set = 1 unit flexibars
Terminal for 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9215-4TD00 1 unit 0.280

circular conductors
1 set = 1 unit
1 set = 1 unit 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9224-4TD00 1 unit 0.430
1 set = 1 unit 2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9215-4TF00 1 unit 0.680
1 set = 1 unit 2 x 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9224-4TF00 1 unit 0.830
Terminals for 6 x 6 ... 35 Cu/Al cables 3VT9203-4TF00 1 unit 0.100

circular conductors,
for 6 cables
1 set = 1 unit
Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al busbars 3VT9200-4RC00 1 unit 0.320

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/9
© Siemens AG 2014

Further accessories

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit;
2
in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is fed-in from below
(power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most
cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side
• set of two pieces, for 3-pole version 3VT9300-8CE30 1 unit 0.090
• one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version 3VT9300-8CE00 1 unit 0.040
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20

Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP20
when using 3VT9224-4TD30, 3VT9215-4TF30,
3VT9224-4TF30 or 3VT9203-4TF30 block type terminals,
intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions.
• 3-pole version 3VT9200-8CB30 1 unit 0.140
Locking device for knob 3VT9200-3HL00 1 unit 0.013
Enables locking the circuit breaker in "switched off manually" position.
For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a
shank diameter of max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing inset 3VT9200-8BN00 1 unit 0.001

Provides sealing for:
• trip unit
• accessory compartment cover
• terminal cover
• rotary operating mechanism
• motorized operating mechanism
Additional cover for trip units 3VT9200-8BL00 1 unit 0.080

Provides protection for trip units
Connecting cable 3VT9300-4PL00 1 unit 0.167

For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in
withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted
version)
Position signalling switch 3VT9300-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
For indicating the position of the circuit breaker located in the plug-in
base or withdrawable version base
Coding set 3VT9200-4WN00 1 unit 0.002

Prevents insertion of wrong switching unit
into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base
Pushbutton cover 3VT9300-3MF20 1 unit 0.054

For motorized operating mechanism

2/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars
for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
Main circuit
• The main circuit is connected with Cu or Al busbars, or with Rated current Permissible cross-section Busbars
cables and cable lugs. In S WxH
• Connecting sets are available for additional connecting op- Cu Al Cu Al
2
tions (see page 2/9). A mm2 mm2 mm mm
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected 40 10 16
to input terminals 1, 3. 5 and conductors from the load to ter- 50 10 16
minals 2, 4, 6. But it is possible to exchange this connection
63 16 25
(exchanging input and output terminals without limiting rated
short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu). 80 25 35
• In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch dis- 100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2

connectors must be fitted with 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating bar- 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
riers also next to and between terminals 2, 4, 6. 160 70 95 25 x 3 25 x 4
• We recommend painting the connecting busbars with different 200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
colors.
250 120 150 25 x 5 25 x 6
• Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces
to the circuit breaker during short circuiting. Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the in accordance with the ambient temperature
not obstructed (see page 2/44). 3VT2 circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole
by 1 x 120 mm2 Cu cable
Auxiliary circuits
-15 °C...50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
• Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are con-
nected using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors. 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A
• Motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of the

plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected with
a connector. Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for 3VT2
Ik ≤ 25 kA Ik ≤ 65 kA
70
20
20
70
I201_18831
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/11

© Siemens AG 2014

Article No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-section
permitted
current Cable type
Imax Sector-shaped con- Sector-shaped Round Round conductor, Busbars and Technical
ductor, stranded conductor, solid conductor, stranded solid cable lugs information
WxH
2
A mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm See page
3VT9200-4TA30 250 25 x ...
3VT9200-4RC30 250 25 x ... 2/48, 2/59
3VT9200-4TF00
3VT9200-4TC30 250 16 ... 150 Cu 10 ...150 Cu 16 ... 150 10 ...150 Cu
3VT9200-4TC00
3VT9215-4TD30 250 25 ... 150 Cu/Al 16 ...150 Cu/Al 25 ... 150 Cu/Al 16 ... 150 Cu/Al
3VT9215-4TD00
3VT9224-4TD30 250 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 2/46, 2/59
3VT9224-4TD00
3VT9215-4TF30 250 2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al 2/47, 2/59
3VT9215-4TF00
3VT9224-4TF00
3VT9203-4TF00
3VT9200-4ED30 250 2/48
3VT9200-4EE30 250 2/49
3VT9200-4TN30 10/16 1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6 Cu flexible conductor
2/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector Unit
Article Numbers 3VT2725-2AA36/46/56-0AA0, 3VT9225-6DT00
3VT2725-3AA36/46/56-0AA0
Standards EN 60947-2, IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles
Rated current In A
3, 4
100, 160, 200, 250 --
2
Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 250
Rated operational current Ie A -- 250
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690, DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A --
Utilization category (switching mode)
• AC 609 V -- AC-23 B
• DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t 2,5 kA/1 s 3 kA/5 s
Series Ue 3VT2 N 3VT2 H Ue --
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) Icu 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V --
36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
25 kA 25 kA AC 440 V
16 kA 25 kA AC 500 V
10 kA 13 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 30 kA 50 kA AC 230 V --
18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
13 kA 13 kA AC 440 V
8 kA 13 kA AC 500 V
5 kA 8 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 4 kA/AC 415 V, 4 kA/DC 440 V
Off-time at Icu ms 10 --
Losses per pole at In = 250 A W 18
Mechanical endurance cycles 30 000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 3 000
Switching frequency cycles/hr 120
Operating force N 80
Front-side device protection IP40
Pollution degree 3
Plug-in design ✓/✓
Withdrawable design ✓/✓
Accessories
Switches – auxiliary/relative/signal/leading (early) ✓/✓/✓/✓
Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch ✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with alarm switch ✓/✓
Front rotary operating mechanism/lateral operating mechanism at the ✓/✓
right/left hand side
Mechanical interlocking of rotary operating mechanisms, by Bowden wire ✓/✓
Motorized operating mechanism/with operations counter ✓/✓
Locking-type knob ✓
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit ✓/✓
✓ available -- unavailable
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/13

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Schematics
3-pole version
Recommended wiring of the
control circuits
Q3
2
L+ Plug-in device/Withdrawable device
2 4 1 1 3 5
ON -4WA30
SO 1
S
B OFF -4PA30
Motor drive Auxiliary trips/Leading contact (early) Main circuit
C1
D1
1 3 5
D1
10.Y1
10.Y1
3VT9300-2AJ00
10.Y3
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1U.10
3VT9300-1S.00
3VT92..-6..
A
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
or or or V Q
S5 M P U< U U< B
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
C2
D2
D2
8 6 2 2 1 2 4 6
X3 X4 J
Acc. comp. No.10 -4WA30
NSO0_00089a
PE N–
YC SO 2 SO 3
Ext.oper. -4PA30
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Plug-in device/Withdrawable device
Connecting cable
MP 3VT3200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
M Motor
X2 P Energy storage device
Switches X3 Connector to connect control circuits
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary X4 Connector for external operations counter
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
S5 Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes

A YC 3VT9300-3MF10 external operations counter
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in

the scope of supply of the operating mechanism)
ON, OFF Pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic
storage, switch may be continuously switched on)
B Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AF10
J 3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit

Q Main contacts
T1, T2, T3, T41) Current transformers
V Trip-free mechanism
or or or or or or TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit
NSO0_00090b
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
2.2
2.1
3.4
3.2
3.1
2.4
3.4
2.2
3.4
2.2
3.2
3VT9200-4PA30/ 3-pole plug-in base/ 4-pole plug-in base

acc. c. No. 1 acc. c. No. 2 acc. c. No. 3 acc. c. No. 2 + 3 -4PA40
3VT9200-4WA30/ 3-pole withdrawable version base/ 4-pole withdrawable ver-
X1 -4WA40 sion base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1, X2 3VT9300-4PL00 connecting cable
Connecting cable SO1, SO2, SO3 Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch dis-
1)
Only for 4-pole version of 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching unit. connector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base
(Position signalling switch 3VT9300-4WL00)
3VT9300-1U.00 Undervoltage trip unit
3VT9300-1S.00 Shunt trip unit
3VT9300-1U.10 Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact
3VT9300-2AJ00 Leading contact (early)
acc. c. No. Accessory compartment number
2/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

4-pole version
control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5 N
ON -4WA40
S
2
SO 1
B OFF -4PA40
Motor drive Auxiliary trips/Leading contact (early) Main circuit
3VT9 2..-6..0 1 3 5 7
C1
10.Y1
10.Y1
D1
D1
10.Y3
3VT9300-2AJ00
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1U.10
3VT9300-1S.00
A
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
or or or V Q
S5 M P U< U U< B
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
T4
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
D2
D2
C2
8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J 2 4 6 8
Acc. comp. No. 10 -4WA40
NSO0_00091b
PE N–
YC SO 2 SO 3
Ext.oper. -4PA40
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6 N
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
A
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
B
3.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3.1 3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
or or
4.2 3VT9300-2AC10
4.1 3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
2.2 3VT9300-2AC10
2.1 3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9300-2AE10
3.4 3VT9300-2AF10
or or or or or or or or or or or
NSO0_00092a
or or
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
3.4
2.4
2.2
2.2
4.4
5.4
5.1
6.4
6.1
acc.c. No. 1 acc. c. No. 2 acc. c. No. 3 acc.c. No. 2 + 3 acc. c. No. 4 acc. c. No. 5 acc. c. No. 6
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/15

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, ETU MP trip units
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT2 switching unit.
By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the rated current of the
circuit breaker can be easily changed. L I
Trip units for 3VT2 switching units are available for current values Ir
of In = 100, 160 and 250 A. The ETU LP feature rated currents of t
2 160, 200 and 250 A. The trip units (including regulation of -60%)
cover a current range from 40 to 250 A.
tr
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to
achieve the required selectivity).
Ii
ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for 50 ms
3-pole 3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole
NSO0_00215
3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the 0 ms
N pole.
ETU LP trip units I
L I
ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr
and Ii.
t
ETU MPS trip units
L S I
Ir
t
tr
NSO0_00502
Isd
tsd
I
ETU LP trip units have one type of characteristic and fixed-set Ir
NSO0_00214
and Ii settings.
ETU DP trip units
I
L I
ETU MPS trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir,
Ir tr, Ii and tv.
t
ETU DPN trip units
ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole 3VT2725-AA56-0AA0
switching units with protected N pole. They have more characte-
ristics with adjustable Ir , tr , Ii and IN.
L I
Ir
Ii t
IN
NSO0_00506
tr
I
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable
Ir and Ii.
Ii
NSO0_00531
2/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
■ Function
Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current • The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with the Ir
waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is sup- switch. The Ir switch adjusts the rated current of the circuit
ported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled breaker, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms va- trip unit is set to one type of characteristic.
lue. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits • The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are ad-
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
(e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
tors, pulse loading, and the like).
justed with two switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts
the circuit breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves 2
along the current axis.
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
overloading. The tripping characteristics are independent of the the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The
ambient temperature. The trip unit is fixed to the switching unit tripping characteristic thus moves on the time axis. Using the
by two bolts. The transparent cover over the adjustment controls tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics.
can be sealed (with sealing wire). ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor
protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines.
Setting the tripping characteristic Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10, 20, 30. By
changing tr, it is possible to select the trip unit characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard according to the required motor starting characteristic (light,
EN 60947-2. For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the cha- medium, heavy or very heavy starting).
racteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines
unit. or transformers.
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker back on immedi-
available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning ately after the time-dependent trip unit has been actuated and
Electrical Power Distribution). the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed
to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The thermal memory can
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal be disabled by turning the switch from the normal "Tt" position
protection. to the "T0" position. In the "T0" position the time-dependent trip
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deacti-
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of vated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selecti- in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could
vity of protective devices. For MPS trip units, the delay can be be rising temperature in the protected device, causing re-
set at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. peated tripping.
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against 2. Delayed time-independent trip unit S
ultimate short-circuit currents. For MP trip units, the time delay This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip
can be set at 0 or 50 ms. units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers.
It is set up using parameters Isd and tsd. Isd is an n-multiple of
current Ir (Isd= n × Ir). Isd is a short-circuit current that, within the
span of Ii to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker with delay tsd, where tsd
is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-
independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in
the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least
the preset delay time tsd.
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit
(short-circuit trip unit) I
• For trip units ETU DP, MP and DPN, the time-independent in-
stantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the Ii switch. The Ii switch
is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, when
reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the
circuit breaker.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/17

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN Isd = 0 ms, min
trip units with load
IN = 0.5 Ir
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the trip-
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the • Provides protection for lines with low starting currents
circuit breaker.
The 3VT92..-6AB00 trip unit is intended only for
The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the 3VT2725 -.AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725 -.AA46-0AA0 switching unit.
tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the mo- The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled.
2 ment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through
the circuit breaker.
The rated currents of the trip units are given by their article num-
bers and correspond to a standardized series of currents (see
specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-set at
Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the 4 × In.
ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip
units enable simulation of a trip unit in warm state. The tripping One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because
times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for
diagram. The steady state is a period during which the charac- less complicated applications.
teristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a re-
duced current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be Specifications
cut by a half. If the load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time Article No. Rated current In Instantaneous short circuit protection
does not become shorter. Ii
NSO0_00217
A A
3VT9216-6AB00 160 640
1.0
k [-] 3VT9200-6AB00 200 800
3VT9250-6AB00 250 1000
0.8
0.6
NSO0_00218
T
10000
5000 Ir
0.4 t [s]
2000
1000
0.2 500
200
L
0.0 100
50 60 70 80 90 100 50
I r [%]
20
Decrease of tripping time with load In = 160 A
10
T - When tripping from the "warm" state, the tripping time of the 5 In = 200 A
characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu by coeffici- In = 250 A
ent k. 2
1
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics 0.5
I
For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is tu ≥ 30 min. During
0.2
this time, the tripping time tsd is cut short from the cold-state cha-
racteristic by the coefficient k. 0.1
0.05 Ii
The real tripping time is ts = k x tsd
0.02
Example
0.01
The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened x In
to:
ts = 0.74 x tsd
k [–] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit
tsd [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
Trip units are preset by the manufacturer
Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
2/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Article No. Rated current Overload pro- Restart Instantaneous
The 3VT92..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for In tection Ir short circuit
protection Ii
3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units.
Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The A A
trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled 40
by turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position 43
T(0). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit re-
2
mains active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an 46
LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load 48
grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of 50
a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and will begin
55
to blink red just before tripping.
58
Located on the lower part of the DP trip unit cover are two pho-
3VT9210-6AC00 100 61 T(0) 4 x lr
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
63 T(t) 8 x lr
DP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed
69
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. 72
DP trip units offer simple adjustment of the tripping characteris- 76

tics. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit 80
tripping level at 4 Ir or 8 Ir. 87
Tripping characteristics 91
NSO0_00219 100
10000
Ir 63
min. x
max.
5000
t [s] Ir Ii 69
2000
72
1000
80
500
87
200
L 91
100
100
50
3VT9216-6AC00 160 110 T(0) 4 x lr
20
115 T(t) 8 x lr
10
In = 100 A 120
5 In = 160 A 3 3
125
2 In = 250 A
130
1
0.5 137
I 144
0.2
150
0.1
0.05 160
In = 100 A 4x
8x
4x
8x
Ii
100
0.02
0.01 110
0.1 115
0.05 125
In = 160 A 4x
8x
4x
8x
Ii
0.02 137
0.01 144
0.1 160
0.05
In = 250 A 3VT9225-6AC00 250 172 T(0) 4 x lr
4x
8x
4x
8x
Ii
0.02 180 T(t) 8 x lr
0.01 190
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
200
x In
210
220
231
243
250
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/19

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Article No. Rated Over- tr (7,2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short
• Can protect lines and transformers cur- load circuit protection Ii
rent In protec-
The 3VT92..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for 3VT2725-.AA36- tion Ir
0AA0 and 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation A A s kA ms
of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip
unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by 40 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,125
turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position 43 3 (TV 3) T(0) 0,25
2 T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit
remains active.
46
48
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
0,4
0,6 0
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the 50 20 (M 20) T(0) 0,8
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will
55 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,0
open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent tripping).
58 8 (M 8) T(0) 1,25
Another parameter for adjusting the MP trip unit consists of the
3VT9210-6AP00 100 61 3 (M 3) T(0) 1,5
rated current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of
the short-circuit trip unit can be set to 0 or 50 ms. The operational 63 3 (M 3) T(t) 1,5
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green 69 8 (M 8) T(t) 1,25
in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of 72 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,0
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this
LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. 76 20 (M 20) T(t) 0,8 50
Located on the lower part of the MP trip unit cover are two pho- 80 20 (TV 20) T(t) 0,6
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. 87 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,4
MP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 91 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,25
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 100 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,125
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set
63 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,2
on the trip unit. Mode "M" provides 4 characteristics suitable for
protecting motors and mode "TV" provides 4 characteristics for 69 3 (TV 3) T(0) 0,4
protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characte- 72 10 (TV 10) T(0) 0,6
ristic can be changed with a selector switch. 80 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,0
87 20 (M 20) T(0) 1,3 0
91 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,6
100 8 (M 8) T(0) 2,0
3VT9216-6AP00 160 110 3 (M 3) T(0) 2,4
115 3 (M 3) T(t)
120 8 (M 8) T(t) 2,0
125 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,6
130 20 (M 20) T(t) 1,3
137 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,0 50
144 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,6
150 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,4
160 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,2
100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,35
110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 0,5
115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 0,75
125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,0 0
137 20 (M 20) T(0) 1,25
144 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,5
160 8 (M 8) T(0) 2,0
3VT9225-6AP00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 2,5
180 3 (M 3) T(t)
190 8 (M 8) T(t) 2,0
200 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,5
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 1,25
220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,0 50
231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,75
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,5
250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,35
2/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
NSO0_00220
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV min. max.
5000 5000
t [s] Ir tr 0 ms 50 ms t [s] Ir tr 0 ms 50 ms
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500
20
200 200
100
50
L
20
tr
100
50
L
tr
2
20
20 20 20
15 15
10 In = 100 A
10 10 10 In = 100 A 8 8
5 In = 160 A 5 In = 160 A
3 3 3 3
In = 250 A In = 250 A
2 2
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 100 A 0.125 0.25 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
1.25
1.5 I i [kA] In = 100 A 0.125 0.25 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
1.25
1.5 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 160 A 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6
2.0
2.4 I i [kA] In = 160 A 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6
2.0
2.4 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 250 A 0.35 0.5
1.25
0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 I i [kA] In = 250 A 0.35 0.5 0.75 1.0
1.25
1.5 2.0 2.5 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/21

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection with timing selectivity Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Article No. Rated Over- tsd (7.2 x Ir) Restart Short circuit protec-
• Can protect lines and transformers cur- load tion (short time
• Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip unit rent In protec- delayed) Ii
tion Ir
The 3VT92..-6AS00 trip unit is intended for 3VT2725-.AA36-
0AA0 or 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation of A A S x Ir ms
the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is 40 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by tur- 43 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
2 ning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0).
After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit re-
mains active.
46
48
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
7
9
50 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 55 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent trip unit). 58 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
Another parameter for adjusting the MPS trip unit is the rated 3VT9210-6AS00 100 61 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit. 63 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
The time delay (tsd) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip 69 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
unit at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir is
signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s inter- 72 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
val. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode incre- 76 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
ases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn 80 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
red and will begin to blink red just before tripping.
87 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
Located on the lower part of the MPS trip unit cover are two pho- 91 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
100 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
MPS trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 63 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set 69 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
on the trip unit. Mode "M" provides 4 characteristics suitable for 72 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
protecting motors, and mode "TV" provides 4 characteristics for 80 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characte-
87 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
ristic can be changed with a selector switch.
91 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
100 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9216-6AS00 160 110 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
115 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
120 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
125 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
130 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
137 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
144 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
150 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
160 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
137 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
144 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
160 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9225-6AS00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
190 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
200 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
2/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
NSO0_00221a NSO0_00222a
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV n
5000 5000 min. max.
t [s] Ir tr Isd t [s] Ir tr Isd
2000 tsd 2000 tsd
1000 1000 20
15
500 500
2
8
20
200 200
3
100 10
L 100
50 L 50 L
20 3 20
20 20
10 In = 100 A 10 In = 100 A 15
5 In = 160 A 10
5 In = 160 A
tr [s] 8
tr [s]
In = 250 A 1 In = 250 A
2 3 2 3
S S
1 1
1
0.5 0.5
300 300
200 200
0.2 0.2
tsd [ms] 100 tsd [ms] 100
0.1 I 0.1
In = 250 A
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
I I
In = 250 A
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
3 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
3 x Ir
0.05 0.05
0.02 0 0.02 0
I sd I sd
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Ir tr I sd tsd In Ir tr I sd tsd In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/23

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU DPN - Distribution protection with protected Adjustable specifications
N pole
Article No. Rated Over- tR (7,2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short
• Provides protection for lines and transformers in TN-C-S and cur- load circuit protection Ii
TN-S networks rent In protec-
tion Ir
The 3VT92..-6BC00 trip unit is intended only for the
3VT2725-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the DPN A A S x Ir ms
trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The DPN trip unit is 40 1 T(0) 2
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by tur- 43 T(0) 4 0
2 ning a switch located on the front panel from position T(t) to po-
sition T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip
unit remains active.
46
48
3 T(0)
T(0)
7
9
50 10 T(0) 2
The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7.2 Ir,
and the tripping level of the short-circuit tripping can be adjus- 55 T(0) 4 100
ted. 58 20 T(0) 7
The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that fla- 3VT9210-6BC00 100 61 T(0) 9
shes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking fre- 63 20 T(t) 2
quency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 69 T(t) 4 200
110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just
before tripping. 72 10 T(t) 7
76 T(t) 9
Located on the lower part of the DPN trip unit cover are two pho-
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. 80 3 T(t) 2
87 T(t) 4 300
The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN
switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the 91 1 T(t) 7
fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the "OFF" 100 T(t) 9
position. 63 1 T(0) 2
Tripping characteristics 69 T(0) 4 0
NSO0_00223 72 3 T(0) 7
10000
IN = 0.5 x Ir
1 x Ir
0.75 x Ir
IN 80 T(0) 9
5000
t [s] IN Ir tr Ii 87 10 T(0) 2
2000 Ir
N min. max. 91 T(0) 4 100
1000 20
500 100 20 T(0) 7
10
3VT9216-6BC00 160 110 T(0) 9
200
3 115 20 T(t) 2
100
50 1
120 T(t) 4 200
125 10 T(t) 7
20
L 20 130 T(t) 9
10
10
5 137 3 T(t) 2
t r [ S]
2 3 144 T(t) 4 300
1 150 1 T(t) 7
1
0.5 160 T(t) 9
In = 100 A 100 1 T(0) 2
0.2
In = 160 A I
0.1 In = 250 A 110 T(0) 4 0
2 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.05 Ii 115 3 T(0) 7

0.02 125 T(0) 9
0.01 137 10 T(0) 2
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In 144 T(0) 4 100
IN Ir tr In Ii 160 20 T(0) 7
3VT9225-6BC00 250 172 T(0) 9
180 20 T(t) 2
190 T(t) 4 200
200 10 T(t) 7
210 T(t) 9
220 3 T(t) 2
231 T(t) 4 300
243 1 T(t) 7
250 T(t) 9
NSO0_00563
2/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
■ Overview
Article number according to contact arrangement
Arrangement Article No. Number of contacts Contact types
of contacts
01 3VT9300-2AC10 (20) 1 NO
20 3VT9300-2AE10 (20) 2 NO
2
01 3VT9300-2AD10 (20) 1 NC
02 3VT9300-2AG10 (20) 2 NC
11 3VT9300-2AF10 (20) 1+1 NC + NO
001 3VT9300-2AH10 (20) 1 NC + NO
Functions and names of switches according to their location in

accessory compartments
Accessory Switch name Switch function
compartment
Location of accessory compartments in 3VT2 circuit breakers
1 Signalling Signalling switch to indicate the state of
the circuit breaker by the trip unit
2 Relative Relative switch to indicate tripping of the
circuit breaker by trip units, TEST push-
button or by OFF pushbutton on the moto-
rized operating mechanism
3, (4, 5, 6)1) Auxiliary Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of
the main contacts
10 Leading Leading switch to make/break in advance
(early) of the main contacts
1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 for 4-pole version only.
■ Function
States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments
Circuit breaker state Accessory compartment
1 2 3 (4 ... 6)1) 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2 3
Toggle position of circuit breaker
3VT9300-2AG10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AE10
3VT9300-2AF10
3VT9300-2AJ00
3VT9300-1U.10
State of the main contacts
NSO0_00093
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off manually or 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

electrically by operating
mechanism
Switched off by trip unit 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off by auxiliary 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

trip unit or by TEST button
or the trip pushbutton on
the motorized operating
mechanism

1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 for 4-pole version only.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/25

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments
Switches
leading contact signaling relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
10.Y1
10.Y3
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3VT9300-2AJ00
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
2
or or
2.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9300-2AC10
4.1 3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9300-2AE10
3.4 3VT9300-2AF10
10.Y2
or or or
10.Y4
NSO0_00224a
or or or or or or or or or or
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.1
3.4
3.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
4.4
5.4
5.1
6.4
6.1
2.4
acc. c. No. 10 acc. c. No. 1 acc. c. No. 2 acc. c. No. 3 acc. c. No. 2 + 3 acc. c. No. 4 acc. c. No. 5 acc. c. No. 6
Article No. 3VT9300-2A.00 3VT9300-2A.101) 3VT9300-2AJ00 3VT9300-2AH10 3VT9300-2AH201)
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 500 AC 5 ... 60 AC 250 AC 24 ...250 AC 5 ..60
DC 60 ... 500 DC 5 ... 60 DC 24 ...250 DC 5 ...60
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500 250
• AC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V -- -- --
• AC-15 6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V 1 A/AC 250 V 1.5 A/AC 250 V --
2A/500 V
• DC-12 -- -- -- -- 0.01 A/DC 60 V
• DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.004 ... 0.01/60 V -- 0.2 A/DC 250 V --
0.3 A/400 V,
0.2 A/500 V
Thermal current Ith A 10 0,5 -- 6 0.5
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 02, 11, 20 001 001
(connected switch)
1)
3VT9300-2A.10 is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads
2/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Article number of shunt trip units
according to the rated operating voltage
Article No. Ue
3VT9300-1SC00 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
3VT9300-1SD00 AC/DC 110 V
3VT9300-1SE00
3VT9300-1SB00
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
DC 12 V
2
Article number of undervoltage trip units
Article No. Rated operating voltage Ue
3VT9300-1UC00 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
3VT9300-1UD00 AC/DC 110 V
Location of accessory compartments 10 in 3VT2 circuit breakers 3VT9300-1UE00 AC 230, 400, 500/DC 220 V
The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip unit is set up by
jumpers located on the right hand side in the trip unit. Default setting is
always the maximum value.
■ Function
Shunt trip units
Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
NSO0_00226
Main contacts Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker

Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
button or by the trip pushbutton on the
compartment
20
accessory
1 motorized operating mechanism

3.4 3.3 20
0 Switched off manually or electrically by
3
Auxiliary switch the operating mechanism

20
1
3.2 3.1 L+
0
Relative switch
compartment
30
accessory
1
2.4 2.3
0
2
C1
Relative switch
3VT9300-1S.00
Reaction time of the shunt trip

30
1
2.2 2.1
0
t [ms] 1
U 0
>50
NSO0_00583
I201_18842a
C2
1
OK
0
N- t [ms]
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/27

© Siemens AG 2014

Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breakers
NSO0_00231b
Main contacts
2 1
Switched on
20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch Switched off by trip units, by TEST
2
button or by the trip pushbutton on
compartment
20
accessory
1 the motorized operating mechanism
3.4 3.3 20
0 Switched off manually or electrically
3
Auxiliary switch by operating mechanism
20
1
3.2 3.1 Arrangement, number and type of contacts
0
Relative switch
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types
compartment
30
accessory
1 02 2 NC
2.4 2.3
0 11 1+1 NC + NO
2
Relative switch
20 2 NO
30
1
2.2 2.1 L+ L+
0
Early switch (Leading)
compartment
20
accessory
1
10
10.Y1
D1
D1
10.Y2 10.Y1 Early switch (Leading)
10.Y4 10.Y3 3VT9300-1U.00
20
10.Y2 10.Y1 1 Reaction time of the undervoltage trip unit
10.Y4 10.Y3
0
3VT9300-1S.00
t [ms]
U< or U< 1
0
NSO0_00230a >50
10.Y2
I201_18897
D2
D2
1
OK
0
N- N- t [ms]
Shunt trip units Undervoltage trip units
Article No. 3VT9300-1S.00 Article No. 3VT9300-1U.00 3VT9300-1U.101)
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
DC 12, 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA Input power at 1.1 Ue VA AC <3
DC < 3 W W DC <3
Functional description U ≥ 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must trip Functional description1) U ≥ 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker can switch on)
Time to switch-off ms 20
U ≤ 0.35 Ue
Continuous load Yes (the circuit breaker must trip)
Connection cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1 Time to switch off ms 20
Terminal protection IP20 Continuous load Yes
(connected trip unit)
Location in accessory 10
compartment No. Terminal protection IP20
compartment No.
Leading switch
Rated operating voltage Ue V -- AC 250
Rated frequency fn Hz -- 50/60
Rated operating current Ie/Ue V -- AC 1 A/259
Arrangement of contacts -- 02, 11, 20
Connector cross-section S mm2 -- 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection -- IP20
1)
Cannot be used in combination with 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating
mechanism.
2/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking and mechanical interlocking for
parallel switching
The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms
are required: • Mechanical interlocking for fixed-mounted versions require
the following components:
• To switch the switching unit: - 2 x 3VT9200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20 black knob - 2 x 3VT9200-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9300-3HF20 red knob
• To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet
door:
• Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is suitable for fixed-
mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions 2
- 3VT9300-3HJ..extension shaft • Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the follow-
- 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling oper- ing components:
ating mechanism - 2 x 3VT9200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob - 1 x 3VT9200-3HE/HF.. knob
■ Design
circuit breaker:
Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. 1)
Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet
3VT9200-3HC/HD10.. rotary operating mechanism
Enhanced safety for operator:
• The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to
lock the circuit breaker in position "switched off manually". The
unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be
locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm
• Each coupling driver prevents the cabinet door from being
opened when the circuit breaker is in on-state or after tripping.
Types 3VT9300-3HG10 and 3VT9300-3HG20 prevent the cab-
inet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in the
Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver
and knob
state "switched off manually" and when the rotary operating
mechanism knob is locked out.
The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the • Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be
circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch machi- provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel me-
nes on and off. The modular concept of the operating mecha- chanical switching (see page 2/31).
nisms allows simple mounting on the switching unit after the ac-
cessory compartment cover is removed. The operating By a screwdriver it is possible to unlock the mechanism blocking
mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately, the switchboard door opening with the circuit breaker switched
(see page 2/6). on (3VT9300-3HG30 or 3VT9300-3HH30).
• The rotary operating mechanism is attached to the switching
unit of the circuit breaker
• The coupling driver is attached to the switchgear door. It pro-
vides degree of protection IP40 or IP66
• The knob is placed on the rotary operating mechanism or on
the coupling driver
• The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjust-
able length 245 ... 410 mm).
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/29

© Siemens AG 2014

Features
Article No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length
lock the circuit brea- protection when circuit breaker is mm
ker in OFF mode
manually and
locked
2 3VT9200-3HB20
3VT9200-3HC10
yellow
gray
yes
no
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3VT9200-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism gray no -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HE20 Knob, lockable with padlock black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HF20 Knob, lockable with padlock red yes -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HG20 Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9300-3HH20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9300-3HJ10 Extension shaft, can be shortened -- -- -- -- -- 365
2/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Function
3VT9300-8LA00 Mechanical interlocking 3VT9300-8LB00 Mechanical parallel switching
Mechanical interlocking make sure that two circuit breakers can- Mechanical interlocking for parallel switching are for simultane-
not trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit ous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can used between two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between 3VT2 and
be used between two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between one 3VT3 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished
3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with
be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of a knob.
them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob).
When using a mechanical interlocking for parallel switching it is
When using a mechanical interlocking it is required to comply required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and
with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. in the table.
1 3 5
L
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
X X
TEST TEST
NSO0_00233
NSO0_00234
Left Right switching unit Left Right switching unit

switching switching
unit 3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3 3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3
unit
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole1)
X L X L X L X L X L X L X L X L
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
3VT2 3P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2 3P 105+7 112+7 140+7 145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x x
3VT2 4P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2 4P 105+7 112+7 140+7 145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x x
3VT3 3P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3 3P 122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7 145.5+7 x x
3VT3 4P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3 4P 122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7 145.5+7 x x
1)
Switching unit 3VT3 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00235
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/31

© Siemens AG 2014

3VT9.00-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking • Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/
switch disconnectors, so that they cannot both trip simultane-
ously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit
breakers may be turned off simultaneously.
• The 3VT9200-8LC10 mechanical interlocking is intended for
two 3VT2 circuit breakers. 3VT9300-8LC20 interlocking is in-
tended for one 3VT2 circuit breaker and one 3VT3.
• Circuit breakers can be delivered in fixed-mounted, plug-in
and withdrawable versions.
2
Article No. of mechanical 3VT9200-8LC10 3VT9300-8LC20
interlocking
Circuit breaker types 3VT2 3VT3
3VT2 3VT2
Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear

assemblies
Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use",
which is available on our website:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/product-support
NSO0_00236
109
ON ON
0
=4
0 ... 700
min
R
OFF OFF
45
TEST TEST
30 min. 80
2/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off po-
sition using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter
max. 4.3 mm.
• A 3VT9300-3MF20 cover can be attached to the ON-OFF
switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then
sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the cir-
cuit breaker from the drive panel.
• Extension cable 3VT9300-3MF00 has a connector on one side
that connects to the connector located on the motor mecha- 2
nism and conductors on the other side that connect, for exam-
ple, to a terminal block.
• Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy sig-
• It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch nals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state can be
off/on). signalled from a distance.
• Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit breaker • Motor drive can be sealed means of bolt sealing
cover of cavities is removed. 3VT9200-8BN00
• Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand by
units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric de-
vices is needed.
Article No. 3VT9200-3M..0
• In order to speed up the circuit breaker‘s switch off (e.g. safety
STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt trip can be Operational voltage Ue V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
used. DC 24, 48, 110, 220
• On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over switch Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL: Control pulse length for storing ms 400 ... ∞1)
- AUTO mode - remote control. The circuit breaker is con-
Control pulse length ms 20 ... 7001), 400 ... ∞1)
trolled by buttons for remote switch off/on, furthermore in this
position mechanical control can be used on the front panel Time before switching on ms < 50
of the motor drive. Time before switching off ms 800
- MANUAL mode - manual control. Control voltage is not Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 3 contact making/min
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using the
green switch on button and switched off using the red switch Frequency of cycles - 10 contact making
instant successive ON/OFF
off button on the front part of the drive cover. Electric switch cycles
on is blocked. Electric switch off is functional. The accumu-
lation of energy can be done by means of hinged lever. Mechanical endurance 30000 contact making
• Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/MANUAL Input power AC VA 100
switch. DC W 100
• In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the Protection
green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the • AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V 5SX4104-7; 5SX4102-7
motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the re-
• DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V 5SX5104-7; 5SX5102-7
mote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out,
whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains Rated operating current V AC 5 A/250
active for safety reasons. AUTO/MANUAL switches Ie/Ue DC 0.5A/250
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir-
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first Article No. 3VT9300-3MF00
position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is Number of conductors 12
tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage
trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit Conductor cross sections S mm2 0.35
breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated Conductor lengths cm 60
to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The 1) For sequence of control pulses, see 2/34.
motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by perma-
nent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit
breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch
the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse.
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to con-
trol the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN-
UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage
unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging
the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to
switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons lo-
cated on the front panel of the motor mechanism.
• The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to
indicate what state the 3VT motor mechanism unit storage is
in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on.
The 3VT motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate the
storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the termi-
nal strip. 3VT2 motor mechanism have optional designs,
alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
• The mechanism can be furnished with an electromechanical
operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or
outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the switchgear door). A
metal holder included in the scope of supply of the external
operations counter. Connecting is facilitated with connectors.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/33

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Function
Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mecha- Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – electrically by pushbutton ON nism – electrically by pushbutton OFF
NSO0_00238
NSO0_00239
2
2 1 50 2 1 800
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch
compartment
compartment
50 800
accessory
accessory
1 1
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3 20
0
3
0
3
40 800
1 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
Relative switch Relative switch
compartment
compartment
accessory
accessory
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
2
2
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
Early switch Early switch
compartment
compartment
20
accessory
900
accessory
1 1
10
10
10.Y2 10.Y1 0 10.Y2 10.Y1 0

10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y4 10.Y3
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y1 1 10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3 10.Y4 10.Y3
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Wiring diagram Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Recommended wiring of the control circuits Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker
Q3
Switched on
L+
ON
Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
S button or by the trip pushbutton on the
OF F motorized operating mechanism
B
Switched off manually or electrically by
the operating mechanism
Motor drive
9 7 3 4 1 5
X3
Wiring diagram description
Symbol Description
NC NO
M Motor
S5
C
P storage mechanism
M P X3 Connector to connect control circuits
X4 Connector for external operations counter
S5 Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
MP
YC external 3VT9300-3MF10 operations counter
8 6 2 2 1 B recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included
X3 X4
in operating mechanism order)
ON make pushbutton
PE N- OFF break pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage
Ext. oper. (switched on = automatic storage, may be
counter
continuously switched on)
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
2/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Tripping off the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha- Wiring diagram
nism by the trip unit (switch S – automatic spring charging)
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit
NSO0_00241a
Main contacts Recommended wiring of the
2 1 20 control circuits
4 3 1
6 5
0 Q3
Auxiliary switch
L+
compartment
2
accessory
20
1
3.4 3.3 20
ON
3
0
Auxiliary switch
S
20
1 OFF
3.2 3.1 B
0
Relative switch Motor drive
compartment
accessory
30 520
1
C1
D1
2.4 2.3
2
0
Relative switch
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1S.00
30 520
1
2.2 2.1
0
Alarm switch
compartment
accessory
30 520
1 NC NO
1.4 1.3
1
0
Alarm switch
or
30 520 S5 M P U< U
1
1.2 1.1 C
0
t [ms]
MP
NSO0_00243b
D2
C2
Tripping off the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha- 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J
nism by a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit (switch S – acc. c. no.10
automatic spring charging) PE N-
YC
N-
NSO0_00242
Main contacts Ext. oper.

counter
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5 Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
0 (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the undervoltage trip
Auxiliary switch
unit
compartment
20
accessory
1
3.4 3.3 20 Recommended wiring of the
0
3
control circuits
Auxiliary switch
Q3
20 L+
1
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch ON
compartment
S
30 520
accessory
1
2.4 2.3
B OFF
0
2
Relative switch Motor drive
30 520
C1
D1
1
2.2 2.1
0
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1S.00
t [ms]
NC NO
or
S5 M P U< U
C
MP
NSO0_00244b
D2
C2
8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J
acc. c. no.10
PE N-
YC
N-
Ext.oper.
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/35

© Siemens AG 2014

Recommended actuating pulses Description of charts
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha- Symbol Description
nism – switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging)
HK main contacts
or open
PS auxiliary switch
50 RS relative switch
800
1 R OFF circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit
HK
0 IMP S pulse to charge spring mechanism
2 PS 1
800 > 600 IMP ON
IMP OFF
make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
0 X random segment of time
> 100
NSO0_00245
> 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0 Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers
t [ms]
Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breakers
Switched on
Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage
trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
50 the motorized operating mechanism

HK by the operating mechanism
0
520 > 880 In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical
RS 1 interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch
0 the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a
NSO0_00246a
> 1400
standby circuit breaker may fail.
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
Circuit breaker switched off by the rip unit or shunt/undervoltage

trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – S switch closed only for storing
50
HK 1
0
X + 520 > 880

RS 1
0
> 100
NSO0_00247a
X > 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP S IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
2/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Recommended control pulses for switching of the 3VT2 circuit
breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after their swit- Symbol Description
ching off by a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit in the auto- HK Main contacts
matic standby system RS Relative switch
SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
NSO0_00080
> 1400 IMP ON Motorized operating mechanism make pulse
200 … 700
2
1 IMP OFF Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse (generated
IMP ON by S switch)
0
Switched on
50
1
HK
0 Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbutton
520 > 880

RS 1 Switched off manually or by motorized operating mecha-
0 nism electrically (wound up state)
20
200
SV 1
0
SP 1
0
t [ms]
NSO0_00081
> 100
400 … ∞ 200 … 700

1
IMP S IMP ON
0
50
X > 1400
1
HK
0
X + 520 > 880

RS 1
0
20
>200
SV 1
0
SP 1
0
t [ms]
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/37

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
■ Overview
Plug-in bases Position signalling
3VT9300-4WL00 position signalling switch
2
The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four swit-
ches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the con-
nected/removed position.
3VT9200-4PA30 Locking plug-in base against
base inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector States of 3VT9300-4WL00 switches in the plug-in base
according to the circuit breaker position
The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid ex- Accessory compartment 11 ... 14 (19, 20)1)
change of the circuit breaker is needed. Circuit breaker position 1
• The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assem-
bling a circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in design 2 4
from the original fixed-mounted version Connected 0 1
• The components of the plug-in base are: Removed 1 0
- supporting part of the plug-in base
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the 0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed
switching unit 1)
Accessory compartments 19 and 20 are for 4-pole version only.
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off
of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting and removal) Technical specifications
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in
Article No. 3VT9300-4WL00
base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of
mounting bolts is used that is included in the scope of supply Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400
of the 3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit. DC 250
Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
Main circuit
• The 3VT9200-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of sup- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
3 A/400 V
ply of the 3VT9275-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit AC-13
• For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect- DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
ing sets (see page 2/9)
Thermal current Ith A 6
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda-
tions (see page 2/11). Arrangement of contacts 001
Auxiliary circuits
(connected switch)
A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plug-

in mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on
page 2/14.
These are connected using a 3VT9300-4PL00 15-wire cable.
Coding
Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism
3VT9200-4WN00 coding set
The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a
coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker
into the plug-in base. Circuit breaker, plug-in version, with motorized operating mechanism
2/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design
Symbol Description
MP control circuit M Motor
Q3 P energy storage device
L+ X3 terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 terminal strip for external operations counter
ON
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
B
OFF
YC
B
3VT9300-3MF10 external operations counter
recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits
2
Motor drive not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
ON make pushbutton
4 3 1 OFF break pushbutton
X3
S Switch to store energy
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for
AC 24 V 5SX4104-7
AC 48 V 5SX4104-7
AC 110 V 5SX4104-7
AC 230 V 5SX4102-7
M P DC 24 V 5SX5104-7
DC 48 V 5SX5104-7
DC 110 V 5SX5104-7
DC 230 V 5SX5104-7
Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating

mechanism
MP
• Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend
first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized oper-
X3
2 5 6 7 8 ating mechanism to the MANUAL position
• More operating information is available in the operating in-
B structions
NSO0_00061a
• Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-

HL1 HL2 HL3 HL4
N- mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully switch on at the first attempt.
Recommended process of manipulation

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in design
it is necessary to accomplish the operations in following se-
quence, after repeated insertation into the plug-in device:
1) press the switch off button (red) on the
motor operating mechanism
2) press the switch on button (green) on
the motor operating mechanism
1 2
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/39

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
State of switches before removing State of switches after removing
inserted position → withdrawn position
Accessory compartment Accessory compartment
1 2 3 (4,5,6)1) 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1)
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
2
Knob position of
circuit breaker
main contacts
State of the
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 4 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Manually switched off or switched off 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

by motorized operating mechanism
Switched off by trip units 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Switched off from switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton
located on the motorized operating mecha-
nism

1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 are for 4-pole version only.
2/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

for withdrawable version
■ Design
Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling
2
The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for si-
gnalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
Circuit breaker installed 3VT9200-4WA30 Technical specifications
in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base
Article No. 3VT9300-4WL00
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-discon-
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400,
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of AC 250
the circuit are needed. Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
• The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixed- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
mounted version to withdrawable version.
AC-13 3 A/400 V
• The components of the withdrawable version are:
DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
- supporting part of the withdrawable version
- 2 movable side plates Thermal current Ith A 6
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the Arrangement of contacts 001
switching unit Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off
of the circuit breaker for handling, inserting and withdrawing) Terminal protection IP20
(connected switch)
- a set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
version mounting base into the switchboard For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in plug-in base with ac-
Main circuit cessories, see page 2/14.
• The 3VT9200-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting States of 3VT9300-4WL00 switches in withdrawable device
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of sup- according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
ply of the 3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
Accessory compartment
• For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect-
ing sets (see page 2/9) 11,12,13,14 15,17 16,18
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda- (19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
tions (see page 2/11). Circuit breaker and lockout 1 1 1
position
Auxiliary circuits 2 4 2 4 2 4
Connected and unlocked 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 0
Withdrawn and unlocked 1 0 0 1 0 1
These are connected using the 3VT9300-4PL00 15-wire cable. 1 0 0 1 1 0
Removed and unlocked 1 0 1 0 0 1
Coding
1 0 1 0 1 0
0 = contact open; 1 = contact closed
1)
• Operating state is always in locked-out position
• In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for
more detailed information, see "Advantages and enhanced
safety for operator")
The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker

can be provided with a coding set, which prevents inserting ano-
ther circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting
base.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/41

© Siemens AG 2014

Locking Description
Symbol Description
M Motor
P energy storage device
X3 terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 terminal strip for external operations counter
2 S5
YC
Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
3VT9300-3MF10 external operations counter
B recommended wiring of the control circuits (control cir-
Locking the circuit breaker Locking the withdrawable version cuits not included in motorized operating mechanism
in withdrawable version base against inserting the circuit breaker delivery)
base against tampering ON make pushbutton
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism OFF break pushbutton
S Switch to charge spring mechanism
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for
AC 24 V 5SX4104-7
AC 48 V 5SX4104-7
AC 110 V 5SX4104-7
AC 230 V 5SX4102-7
DC 24 V 5SX5104-7
DC 48 V 5SX5104-7
DC 110 V 5SX5104-7
DC 230 V 5SX5104-7
Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker

Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable with motorized operating mechanism
version with motorized operating mechanism • Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the mo-
MP control circuit torized operating mechanism to MANUAL position
Q3 • More operating information is available in the operating
L+ instructions
• Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
ON mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
OFF successfully switch on at the first attempt.
B
Motor drive
X3 4 3 1
M P
MP
2 5 6 7 8
X3
B
NSO0_00061a
HL1 HL2 HL3 HL4

N-
2/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Switches in the accessory compartments of the switching unit
Changes in states of the switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
1
State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position

Circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion
- withdrawn position → - connected position
Circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal
- connected position → - withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1) 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1)
2
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
Knob position of circuit
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
breaker
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Manually switched off or by 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

motorized operating mechanism
Switched off from switched-on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

state: by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF push-
button on the motorized operating
mechanism

1) Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 are for 4-pole version only.
Installation positions: fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design

I201_18960
25°
90°
90°
90°
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/43

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit • Terminals 2, 4, 6
breakers and switch disconnectors - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the
source with terminals 2, 4, 6 and if Ue = AC 415 V, it is nec-
Fixed-mounted version essary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a
Front connection 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal cover.
• Terminals 1, 3, 5 - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main
circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections
2
- If Ue = AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30
insulating barriers or 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal covers. are not used, then it is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 in-
- If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main sulating barriers or 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal covers.
circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or rear connection, it is Rear connection
necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a • Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be
3VT9200-8CB30 terminal cover. used.
Plug-in and withdrawable versions
Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used.
D 1 1 B = 105 C = 80
1 3VT9200-8CB30
100 … 150
A2
A1
A
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
B=0 C=0
ON ON ON
225
OFF OFF OFF
TEST TEST TEST

NSO0_00105a
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
20
B = 20
105 105 105 B = 20
A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-

disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for con-
nections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with
rear connection)
A1 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers from 50 mm to max. 100 mm,
or by adding additional insulation for the conductors with barri-
ers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated
earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and bus-
bars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breaker/switch disconnectors situated ver-
tically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors above one another
B, C Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector
and uninsulated earthed wall
D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
2/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

D
Busbar
max. 3 mm
> 15 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
NSO0_00106
AC Ue 230 V 415 V 500 V 690 V
3VT2 H wired with Ik 1) ≤ 100 kA > 36 ... 65 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 25 kA ≤ 13 kA
3VT2 N wired with Ik ≤ 60 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 16 kA ≤ 10 kA
C < 80 mm A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 200 250 200 250 250
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 30 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200
C ≥ 80 mm A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200
1)
Ik = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms).
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/45

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, fixed-mounted version

35 35 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
2 25
18
4
Drilling pattern
35
48 4 x Ø 5.5
60
ON 26°
17°
65
225
154
162
193
167
213
162
2°
29.5
OFF
TEST R 88
121
NSO0_00503
35.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5
20 35 35
26 105
105 117 5
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9224-4TD30 connecting set)

42
35 35 25
35
ON
335
225
248
273
162
193
223
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00107
30
105 Ø 22
105
2/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

35 35 40 24
25
35 2
ON
335
244
225
301
162
193
281
224
261
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00109
25
105 Ø 18
Ø 18
105

58
35 35 47
24
24 36
24
35
ON
335
223
269
225
246
287
162
193
213
236
259
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00113
11
25
105 6 x Ø 8.4
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/47

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (3VT9200-4RC30 connecting set) Drilling pattern
2
7.5
35
4
35 35 46 105
8.5
21
20
35
48
2
ON
154
162
65
193
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
Ø 8.5
6
NSO0_00115
28
16
16
105 36 35
98
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9200-4ED30 connecting set)

105
50 50
35 35
29 4
24
35
ON
273
193
162
225
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00121
36.5
Ø1
1
32 32
12.5
2/48 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9200-4EE30 connecting set)
35 35
25
3 29 4
2
35
ON
360
308
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
105
Ø 11
32 32
81.5
NSO0_00123
15 25
70 70
Fixed-mounted version, with rotary operating mechanism
42.5 1
NSO0_00118a
1 3VT2
2 2 3VT9200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5
3 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
37
50
TEST
133
2 4 6
°
90
140 50
25°
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/49

© Siemens AG 2014

1 2
1 3VT2
NSO0_00126a
5
2 3VT9200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 4
3 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70
4 3VT9300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
37
5 3VT9300-3HJ.0
2 6 Outside surface of
70
cabinet door
50
TEST
133
2 4 6
6
°
90
140
25° 180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
Cabinet door cut-out

min. 145 27.5
Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating
4 x Ø 6.5
mechanism
Opening dimensions in switchgear door
for external operation cycle
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00128
55
Hinge of cabinet door
7.9
R 48
1
14
ax
m
R
MANUAL
AUTO
27
195
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
138
82
NSO0_00129
247
2/50 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, plug-in version

Plug-in base 3VT9200-4PA30 Drilling patterns
25 4
35 35 18
145
1 3 5
227
140
290
258
227
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm 4 x Ø 5.5
2 4 6
20 4 x Ø 5.5
26
75
75
35
NSO0_00132
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35 35 35
26 35
105 105
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/51

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in base, 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal cover
2 1 3 5
105
11 12 13 14
400
L R
Ø 4+6 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00136
105 35
70
103
Plug-in version
ON
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00520
105 105
140
157
182
2/52 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version Drilling patterns
2
7.5
46 105 98 98
21
21
4
20
52
8.5
ON
2
258
290
227
258
140
258
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
45
Ø 8.5
6
75
R
NSO0_00139
31.5
28
28
16
16
105 36 35 35 35 35
Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism
TEST
NSO0_00142
175
225
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/53

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
2 MANUAL
AUTO
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00143
282 31
2/54 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, withdrawable version

Withdrawable version 3VT9200-4WA30 Drilling patterns
25 4
35 35 18
4 x Ø 5.5 2
145
1 3 5
4 x Ø 5.5
140
227
290
258
227
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
20
26
75
75
NSO0_00148
35
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35
26 35
105 105
Withdrawable version, 3VT9200-8CB30 terminal cover

180
130
105
35
1 3 5
140
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00151
105 70
179 103
140 27.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/55

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version
Operating position Maintenance position
179 30
65
75
75
65
2
ON
140
140
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00153
105 105 105
180 140 170
157 187
182 212
Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism

30
75
75
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00156
175 205
225 255
2/56 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
30
75
75
MANUAL
AUTO 2
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00159
282 31 312 31
Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9200-4RC00 connecting sets) Drilling pattern
2
7.5
46 105 98
21
4
20
52
ON
258
140
258
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
NSO0_00166
28
16
17
37 35 35
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/57

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9200-4RC00 connecting sets) Drilling pattern
35 35 35 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 4
2
18
35
48 4 x Ø 5.5
60
ON
26°
17°
65
225
154
162
193
167
213
162
2°
29.5
OFF
TEST
R 88
121
NSO0_00169
35.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5
20 70 35 35
26 105
140 117 5
2/58 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014


Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set 3VT9224-4TD30 + 3VT9224-4TD00)
35 35 35
N 1 3 5 2
35
ON
335
225
248
273
162
193
OFF
TEST
N 2 4 6
30
NSO0_00521
140
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set 3VT9215-4TF30 + 3VT9215-4TF00)
35 35 35 40 24
25
35
ON
335
244
225
301
162
193
281
224
261
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00174
25
140 Ø 18
Ø 18
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/59

© Siemens AG 2014

105
42 28
35 35 35 25
2
35
ON
294
335
225
248
219
269
162
193
319
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00176
30 Ø 22 Ø 22
140

58
35 35 35 47
36
24
35
ON
335
223
269
225
246
287
162
193
213
236
259
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00178
25
11
140 6 x Ø 8.4
105
2/60 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

2
7.5
35
4
35 35 35 46 105
8.5
21
20
35
48
2
ON
65
154
162
193
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
Ø 8.5
6
NSO0_00180
28
16
16
140 36 35
133
77.5 1
NSO0_00183
1 3VT2
2 3VT9200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 2
3 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
37
50
TEST
133
N 2 4 6
°
90
140 50
25°
1 3VT2
NSO0_00185a
2 3VT9200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5
3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70
4 3VT9300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
37
5 3VT9300-3HJ.0
70
cabinet door
50
TEST
133
N 2 4 6
6
°
90
140
25° 180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/61

© Siemens AG 2014

min. 145 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
2
NSO0_00128
55
Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism

Opening dimensions in switchgear door for external operation cycle
7.9
R 48
14
ax
m
R
MANUAL
AUTO
27
195
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
138
82
NSO0_00187
140 247
2/62 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014


Plug-in base 3VT9200-4PA40 Drilling patterns
35 35 35 25 4
35 18
145
N 1 3 5
227
140
258
227
290
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm 4 x Ø 5.5
N 2 4 6
20 4 x Ø 5.5
26
75
75
NSO0_00189
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35 35 35
26 35
140 105
Plug-in base, 3VT9200-8CB40 terminal cover
105
N 1 3 5
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00193
140 35
70
103
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/63

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version
2 ON
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00138
140 105
140
157
182
Plug-in version, rear connection

(connecting set 3VT9200-4RC30 + 3VT9200-4RC00) Drilling pattern
7.5
2
46 105
21
4
20
52
ON
258
290
140
OFF
258
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
NSO0_00195
16
28
16
140 36 35
2
35 35
140
2/64 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism
2
290
TEST
NSO0_00196
140 175
225
Plug-in version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
290
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00198
140 282 31
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/65

© Siemens AG 2014


Withdrawable version, 3VT9200-4WA40 Drilling pattern
214 25 4
35 35 35 18
2 4 x Ø 5.5
145
N 1 3 5
4 x Ø 5.5
227
140
290
258
227
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
75
75
NSO0_00202
31.5
35.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35
26 35
140 105
215
Withdrawable version, 3VT9200-8CB40 terminal cover

130
105
35
N 1 3 5
140
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00200
140 70
215 103
140 27.5
2/66 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

213 30
65
75
75
65
2
ON
140
140
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00203
140 105 105
215 140 170
157 187
182 212
Withdrawable version, rear connection (connecting set 3VT9200-4RC30 + 3VT9200-4RC00)
2
7.5
213 46 105 133

21
4
20
65
52
ON
258
290
140
OFF
NSO0_00204
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
28
16
17
140 37 35
2
215 35 35
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 2/67

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism
213 30
65
65
75
75
2
140
140
290
TEST
NSO0_00206
140 175 205
215 225 255
Withdrawable version, 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
213 30
NSO0_00207
75
75
65
65
290
MANUAL
AUTO
290
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
140 282 31 312 31

215
2/68 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

3
© Siemens AG 2014

up to 630 A

up to 630 A
3/2 General data
3/5 Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
3/6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism

up to 630 A
3/17 Trip units
3/32 Mechanical interlocking and
parallel switching
3/39 Mounting accessories for plug-in version
3/42 Mounting accessories for withdrawable
version
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Switching unit
3
11
12 3
Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices

1
13
19 20 21
14
15
17 18 22 23 24 25
Accessories
16
NSO0_00211b
26 27 28 29 30
1 Molded case circuit breaker 11 Rotary operating mechanism 22 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
2 Plug-in device 12 Lateral rotary operating mechanism 23 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
3 Withdrawable device 13 Mechanical parallel switching 24 Auxiliary switch, change-over contact
4 Box terminals 14 Mechanical interlocking 25 Auxiliary switch, early
5 Circular conductor terminal 15 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 26 Lockingtype lever
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 16 Motor operating mechanism 27 Sealing inset
7 Multiple feed-in terminal 17 Shunt trip unit 28 Additional cover for
8 Rear connection 18 Undervoltage trip unit overcurrent releases
9 Front connection 19 Connecting cable 29 Terminal cover
10 Auxiliary conductor terminal 20 Position signalling 30 Insulating barriers
21 Coding Set
3/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
■ Overview
Switching unit For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexi-
bars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see
The switching unit includes: page 3/11.
• Two 3VT9300-4TA30 (front connection terminals), connecting
sets – for connecting busbars or cable lugs Circuit breaker
• 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers
• A set of 4 installation bolts (M5 x 25) The circuit breakers consist of a 3- or 4-pole switching unit and
a trip unit which is available with a choice of different characte-
The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker) ristics.
or a 3VT9363-6DT00 switch disconnector unit (switch
disconnector) Switch disconnector
For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a
accordance with the ambient temperature, see page 3/11. switch disconnector unit.

3
Rated current In Breaking capacity Icu DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
(AC 415 V) P. unit per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
3-pole version
630 36 3VT3763-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 5.986
630 65 3VT3763-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 5.970
4-pole version, unprotected N
630 36 3VT3763-2AA46-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
630 65 3VT3763-3AA46-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
4-pole version, protected N
630 36 3VT3763-2AA56-0AA0 1 unit 5.970
630 65 3VT3763-3AA56-0AA0 1 unit 7.400

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/3
© Siemens AG 2014


Rated Current setting of S function short- Operating current DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
current In the inverse- time circuit protec- of the instantane- P. unit per PU
delayed overcurrent tion (short-time ous short-circuit approx.
releases "L" Ir delayed) "S" Isd releases "I" Ii
A A kg
ETU trip units
Line protection, ETU LP, LI function 1)
• for protecting lines with low starting currents
• without Ir regulation
250 250 1000 A 3VT9325-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
315 315 1260 A 3VT9331-6AB00 1 unit 0.304
400 400 1600 A 3VT9340-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
500 500 2000 A 3VT9350-6AB00 1 unit 0.304
630 630 2520 A 3VT9363-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function 1)
3 • for protecting lines and transformers
250 100 ... 250 4 x IR / 12.5 x IR 3VT9325-6AC00 1 unit 0.261
400 160 ... 400 4 x IR / 12.5 x IR 3VT9340-6AC00 1 unit 0.300
630 250 ... 630 4 x IR / 12.5 x IR 3VT9363-6AC00 1 unit 0.300
Distribution protection with N-pole protection,
ETU DPN, LIN function 2)
• for protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
250 100 ... 250 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9325-6BC00 1 unit 0.355
400 160 ... 400 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9340-6BC00 1 unit 0.355
630 250 ... 630 2 ... 9 x IR 3VT9363-6BC00 1 unit 0.345
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function 1)
• for direct protection of motors and generators
• suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
250 100 ... 250 320 ... 3750 A 3VT9325-6AP00 1 unit 0.261
400 160 ... 400 500 ... 6000 A 3VT9340-6AP00 1 unit 0.321
630 250 ... 630 800 ... 7000 A 3VT9363-6AP00 1 unit 0.323
Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function 1)
• for direct protection of motors and generators.
• suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
• enables setting time delay of time-independent trip unit
to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
250 100 ... 250 2 ... 10 x IR 6500 A 3VT9325-6AS00 1 unit 0.260
400 160 ... 400 2 ... 10 x IR 6500 A 3VT9340-6AS00 1 unit 0.260
630 250 ... 630 2 ... 10 x IR 6500 A 3VT9363-6AS00 1 unit 0.323
630 Switch disconnec- 3VT9363-6DT00 1 unit 0.252
tor unit1)
1) Use only with switching unit 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 or

3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0.
2) Use only with switching unit 3VT3763-.AA56-0AA0

3/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
The circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• alarm switches, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• shunt trip units, when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
• undervoltage trip units. trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-

P. unit per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz, DC kg
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Single NO contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AC20
1 unit
1 unit
0.035
0.036 3
Single NC contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AD10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AD20 1 unit 0.013
Double contacts (2 x NC)

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AE10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AE20 1 unit 0.038
Double contacts (NO and NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AF10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AF20 1 unit 0.038
Double contacts (2 x NO)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V 3VT9300-2AG10 1 unit 0.038
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AG20 1 unit 0.038
Changeover contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V 3VT9300-2AH10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9300-2AH20 1 unit 0.013
Leading contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V 3VT9300-2AJ00 1 unit 0.040
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1SC00 1 unit 0.140
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1SD00 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1SE00 1 unit 0.154

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1UC00 1 unit 0.151
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1UD00 1 unit 0.110
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1UE00 1 unit 0.110
with leading contact1)
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1UC10 1 unit 0.120
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1UD10 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1UE10 1 unit 0.120
1)
Not to be used with 3VT9300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism.

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/5
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanisms - 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling
operating mechanism
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from: - 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker:
- 3VT9300-3HA.0 or 3VT9300-3HB.0 for frontside operation Mechanical interlocking and interlocking for parallel
- 3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20 black knob or switching
- 3VT9300-3HF20 red knob • Mechanical interlocking for fixed-mounted version must be
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door: combined from the following parts:
- 3VT9300-3HA.0 or 3VT9300-3HB.0 for frontside operation - 2 x 3VT9300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HJ.. extension shaft - 2 x 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver • Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for
- 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob. fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
• For operation through side wall of cabinet:
- 3VT9300-3HC10 for left side operation OR • Mechanical interlocking must be combined from the following
- 3VT9300-3HD10 for right side operation parts:
- 3VT9300-3HJ..extension shaft - 2 x 3VT9300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 1 x 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
3
P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
• lockable with padlock yellow label 3VT9300-3HB20 1 unit 0.243

• mounted on the left side,
• not lockable

• mounted on the right side,
• not lockable
Knobs for rotary operating mechanism


To be used with the
3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20
black knob
• degree of protection IP40 (switchboard door black 3VT9300-3HG30 1 unit 0.211
Is used in combination with the
3VT9300-3HF20 red knob
• degree of protection IP40 (switchboard door yellow 3VT9300-3HH30 1 unit 0.209
Extension shaft
length 365 mm, may be shortened 3VT9300-3HJ10 1 unit 0.205
Extension shaft, telescopic, 3VT9300-3HJ20 1 unit 0.255

length 245 ... 410 mm

3/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014


P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
The mechanical interlocking additionally require the following parts:
The mechanical interlocking additionally require the following parts:
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wirer
• for two 3VT3 circuit breakers 3VT9300-8LC10 1 unit 0.393
• for one 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker 3VT9300-8LC20 1 unit 0.393
3
Motorized operating mechanisms with storage spring
Rated control supply voltage Us
AC/DC 24 V 3VT9300-3MJ00 1 unit 1.691
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9300-3ML00 1 unit 1.691
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-3MN00 1 unit 1.752
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-3MQ00 1 unit 1.746
with operations counter
AC/DC 24 V 3VT9300-3MJ10 1 unit 1.708
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9300-3ML10 1 unit 1.708
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-3MN10 1 unit 1.708
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9300-3MQ10 1 unit 1.754
Accessories for motorized operating mechanisms
Operations counter with cable, 3VT9300-3MF10 1 unit 0.003
length 110 cm
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, 3VT9300-3MF00 1 unit 0.060

12 wires, length 60 cm

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/7
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Plug-in version Withdrawable version
• The plug-in base includes: • The withdrawable version base includes complete accesso-
- complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ ries for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in
switch disconnectors in plug-in design withdrawable version.
- a set of four installation bolts (M5 x 30) for fixing the switching • The circuit breaker inside the withdrawable version base can
unit to the plug-in base be moved between an operating position and a checking po-
• The plug-in base must be outfitted with: sition (withdrawn).
- 3-pole version: 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit • The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 4-pole version: 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 or - 3-pole version: 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit or
3VT3763-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit - 4-pole version: 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 or
For mounting the plug-in version on busbars or cable lugs, 3VT3763-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit
3VT9300-4TA30 connecting sets are available. These are inclu-
ded in the scope of supply of the 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 3-pole
version ; 3VT3763-.AA46/56-0AA0... 4-pole version switching
unit. For other types of connection, other connecting sets are
3 available.

Version Max. permissible cross-section S DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Plug-in bases
Withdrawable version bases


3/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014


Version Max. permissible Type of connection DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
cross-section S P. unit per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Connecting Sets
Connecting sets for 3-pole version
Box terminals 35 ... 240 Cu Cables, 3VT9300-4TC30 1 unit 0.440
flexibars
Terminals for circular 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9315-4TD30 1 unit 0.302
conductors
For enhancing termination 2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9315-4TF30 1 unit 0.900
point protection to degree of 2 x 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9324-4TF30 1 unit 0.721
protection IP20, use the
3VT9300-8CB30 terminal
3
cover
Terminals for rear connec- Cu/Al busbars 3VT9300-4RC30 1 unit 0.558

tion cable lugs
1 set = 3 units
Terminals for front connec- Cu/Al busbars, 3VT9300-4TA30 1 unit 0.186
tion cable lugs,
1 set = 3 units flexibars
Auxiliary conductor termi- 1.5 ... 2.5; 4 ... 6 Cu flexible 3VT9300-4TN30 1 unit 0.021
nals conductors
Front connection bars

1 set = 3 units increases pole Cu/Al busbars 3VT9300-4ED30 1 unit 0.489
spacing cable lugs,
flexibars
1 set = 3 units increases pole Cu/Al busbars 3VT9300-4EE30 1 unit 0.656

spacing cable lugs,
flexibars
Single terminals for 3- or 4-pole version

Box terminal 35 ... 240 Cu Cables, 3VT9300-4TC00 1 unit 0.580
1 set = 1 unit flexibars
Terminals for circular con- 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables 3VT9315-4TD00 1 unit 0.126
ductors
1 set = 1 unit

Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al busbars 3VT9300-4RC00 1 unit 0.200


Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/9
© Siemens AG 2014

Further accessories

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit;
in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is feed-in from below
(power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most
cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side
• set of two pieces, for 3-pole version 3VT9300-8CE30 1 unit 0.090
• one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version 3VT9300-8CE00 1 unit 0.040
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20

Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP20
when using 3VT9303-4TF30, 3VT9315-4TF30, 3VT9324-4TD30 or
3
3VT9324-4TF30 block type terminals, intended for fixed-mounted,
plug-in and withdrawable versions.
Enables locking the circuit breaker in "switched off manually" position.
For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a
shank diameter of max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing insert 3VT9200-8BN00 1 unit 0.001

• trip unit
• accessory compartment cover
• terminal cover
• rotary operating mechanism
• operating mechanism
Additional cover for trip unit 3VT9200-8BL00 1 unit 0.080

Provides protection for trip units

For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in
withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted
versions)
Position signalling switch 3VT9300-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
For indicating the position of the circuit breaker in the plug-in base or
withdrawable version base
Coding set 3VT9300-4WN00 1 unit 0.005

Prevents insertion of the wrong switching unit
into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base
Pushbutton cover 3VT9300-3MF20 1 unit 0.054

For motorized operating mechanism

3/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars
for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
Main circuit
• Is connected using Cu or Al busbars or cables, and possibly Rated current Permissible cross-section Dimensions of busbars
cables with cable lugs In S WxH
• For further connecting options, connecting sets are available Cu AI Cu Al
(see page 3/9) A mm2 mm2 mm mm
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected
100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). However, it is possible to reverse this 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
connection (exchanging input and output terminals without 160 70 95 25 x 3 32 x 3
limiting the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu) 200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
• In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch dis-
connectors must be fitted with 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating bar- 250 120 150 25 x 5 32 x 5
riers on the bottom side of the circuit breaker/switch discon- 315 150 185 32 x 5 32 x 6
nector 400 185 240 32 x 6 32 x 8
3
• We recommend painting the connecting busbars in different
500 2 x120 2 x185 32 x 8 32 x 12
colors
• Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically 630 2 x185 2 x240 32 x 12 32 x 16
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the
circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for 3VT3
not obstructed (see page 3/45). Ik ≤ 25 kA Ik ≤ 65 kA
Auxiliary circuits
• Auxiliary switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units
are connected to terminals using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu
70
conductors.
• The motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of 20
the plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected
with a connector.
20
70
I201_18831
Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in

accordance with the ambient temperature
3VT3 circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole
by 1 x 185 mm2 Cu cable
-15°C ... 50°C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
630 A 620 A 580 A 540 A 500 A
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/11

© Siemens AG 2014

Article No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S
permitted
current Cable type
Imax Sector-shaped Sector-shaped Round conductor, Round conductor, Busbars and Flexibars Technical
conductor, stranded conductor, solid stranded solid cable lugs information
WxH WxH
A mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm (max.) mm (max.) See page

3VT9300-4TA30 630 32 x... 32 x...
3VT9300-4TD00
3VT9300-4RC30 630 32 x... -- 3/48, 3/59,
3/59, 3/59
3VT9300-4RC00
3
3VT9300-4TC30 400 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu -- 32 x...
3VT9300-4TC00
3VT9324-4TD30 400 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al -- --
3VT9324-4TD00
3VT9315-4TD30 315 25 ... 150 Cu/AI 16 ... 150 Cu/AI 25 ... 150 Cu/AI 16 ... 150 Cu/AI -- --
3VT9315-4TD00
3VT9324-4TF30 630 2 x (150 ... 240) 2 x (120 ... 240) 2 x (150 ... 240) 2 x (120 ... 240) -- -- 3/47, 3/58
Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al Cu/Al
3VT9324-4TF00
3VT9315-4TF30 500 2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (25 ... 150) 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al -- -- 3/48, 3/59
Cu/Al
3VT9315-4TF00
3VT9303-4TF30 250 6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al 6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al 6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al 6 x (6 ... 35) Cu/Al -- -- 3/48, 3/59
3VT9303-4TF00
3VT9300-4ED30 400 3/49
3VT9300-4EE30 630 3/49
3VT9300-4TN30 10/16 1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6 flexible conductor --
Installation positions: fixed, plug-in and withdrawable design

I201_18960
25°
90°
90°
90°
3/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector unit
Article Number 3VT3763-2AA36/46/56-0AA0, 3VT9363-6DT00
3VT3763-3AA36/46/56-0AA0
Standards EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2 EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 3, 4
Rated current In A 250, 315, 400, 500, 630 --
Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 630
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690, DC max. 440
Utilization category
Selectivity AC 690 V A --
3
Switching mode AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t 8 kA/50 ms, 7 kA/300 ms 6,5 kA/1 s 7.5 kA/5 s
Series Ue 3VT3 N 3VT3 H Ue --
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V --
capacity (rms value)1) Icu 36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
35 kA 35 kA AC 440 V
20 kA 35 kA AC 500 V
15 kA 20 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit breaking 40 kA 75 kA AC 230 V --
capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
18 kA 20 kA AC 440 V
10 kA 20 kA AC 500 V
8 kA 15 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-ckt making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 14 kA/AC 415 V, 14 kA/DC 440 V
Mechanical endurance cycles 20000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 5000
Switching frequency cycles/ 120
hr
Plug-in design ✓
Withdrawable design ✓
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/✓/✓/✓
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch, with alarm switch ✓/✓
Front rotary oper. mechanism/lateral oper. mech. right/left ✓/✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary oper. mechanism, ✓
by Bowden wire
Motorized oper. mechanism with operations counter ✓
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit ✓/✓
✓ available, 1) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6 ,
-- unavailable output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/13

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Schematics
3-pole version
control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5
ON 3VT9300-4PA.0
S SO 1
OFF
B 3VT9300-4WA.0
Motor drive Auxiliary trip/Leading Main circuit
3VT9325-6..00 1 3 5
C1
10.Y1
10.Y1
D1
D1
10.Y3
3VT9300-2AJ00
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1U.10
3VT9300-1U.10
3VT9300-1S.00
3
A
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
NC NO
or or or
V Q
S6 S5 M P U< U U< B
C C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
D2
D2
C2
11 8 6 2 2 1 2 4 6
X3 X4 J
acc.comp. No. 10 3VT9300-4PA.0
NSO0_00249a
PE N- YC SO 2 SO 3 3VT9
300-
Ext.oper. 4WA.0
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
A
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
B
or or
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9300-2AE10
3.4 3VT9300-2AF10
NSO0_00250a
or or or or or or or or or or or
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
2.2
2.1
3.4
3.2
3.1
4.4
4.2
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
acc.c. No. 1 acc.c. No. 2 acc.c. No. 3 acc.c. No. 4 acc.c. No. 5 acc.c. No. 2 + 3
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
3/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

4-pole version

control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5 N
ON 3VT9300-4PA.0
S SO 1
OFF
B 3VT9300-4WA.0
Motor drive Auxiliary trip/Leading Main circuit
3VT9325-6..0 1 3 5 7
C1
10.Y1
10.Y1
D1
D1
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1S.00
3VT9300-1U.10
10.Y3
3VT9300-2AJ00
A
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
NC NO 3
or or or
V Q
S6 S5 M P U< U U< B
C C
T1
T2
TEST T3
T4
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
D2
D2
C2
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J 2 4 6 8
acc.comp. No. 10 3VT9300-4PA.0
NSO0_00251a
PE N- YC SO 2 SO 3 3VT9
300-
Ext.oper. 4WA.0
counter 1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6 N
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
A
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
B or or
2.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
7.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
8.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
9.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9300-2AE10
3.4 3VT9300-2AF10
NSO0_00252a
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
7.4
7.1
9.4
9.1
1.4
1.2
1.1
3.4
3.1
4.4
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
6.4
6.1
2.4
2.1
8.4
8.1
acc.c. No. 1 acc.c. No. 2 acc.c. No. 3 acc.c. No. 4 acc.c. No. 5 acc.c. No. 2 + 3 acc.c. No. 6 acc.c. No. 7 acc.c. No. 8 acc.c. No. 9
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/15

© Siemens AG 2014


M Motor
P Energy storage device
X3 Connector to connect control circuits
X4 Connector for external operations counter
S5 Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
S6 Switch to signal full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
YC External operations counter, 3VT9300-3MF10
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits - not inclu-
ded with drive
ON, OFF Pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic sto-
rage, switch may be continuously switched on)
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism
J 3VT3 switching unit
3 Q
T1, T2, T3, T41)
Main contacts
Current transformers
3VT9325-6..00 3VT9363-6DT00 circuit breaker - trip unit - ETU LP, DP,
MDP switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector unit
TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit
3VT9300-4PA.0 3-pole/-4-pole plug-in base
3VT9300-4WA.0 3-pole/-4-pole withdrawable version base
X1, X2 3VT9300-4PL00 connecting cable
SO1, SO2, SO3 Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base
(Position signalling switch 3VT9300-4WL00)
3VT9300-1U.00 Undervoltage trip unit
3VT9300-1S.00 Shunt trip unit
3VT9300-1U.10 Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact
3VT9300-2AJ00 Leading contact
acc. c. No. Accessory compartment number
1)
Only for 4-pole version of the 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit.
■ Functions
States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment
Circuit breaker state Accessory compartment
1 2 3, 4, 5 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2 3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1) (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9300-2AJ00 or
Lever position of circuit breaker
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AG10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AE10
3VT9300-2AF10
3VT9300-1U.10
Switched no 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off manually or 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

mechanism
Switched off by trip unit 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off by auxiliary 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

trip unit or by TEST button
or the trip pushbutton on
the motorized operating
mechanism
1)
0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed Accessory compartment 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4.pole design.
3/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, ETU MP trip units
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT3 switching unit.
By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the circuit breaker’s ra-
ted current can be easily changed. L I
Trip units for 3VT3 switching units are available for current values Ir
of In = 250, 400 and 630 A. The ETU LP trip units feature rated t
currents of 250, 315, 400, 500 and 630A. The trip units (including
regulation of -60%) cover a current range from 100 to 630 A.
tr
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to
achieve the required selectivity):
Ii
ETU LP trip units 50 ms
NSO0_00354
L I 0 ms
t
I
Electronic trip units ETU LP have have more characteristics with

adjustable Ir, tr and Ii.
ETU MPS trip units
L S I
Ir
t
NSO0_00502
tr
I
Electronic trip units ETU LP have one type of characteristic and
fixed In and Ii settings. Isd
tsd
ETU DP trip units
L I
NSO0_00214
Ir
t
I
Electronic trip units ETU MPS have more characteristics with
adjustable Ir, tr, Isd and tsd.
ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for 3-pole
3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole
3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the
Ii
N pole.
ETU DPN trip units
NSO0_00353
L I
Ir
I t
Electronic trip units ETU DP have one type of characteristic with
IN
adjustable Ir and Ii.
tr
Ii
NSO0_00531
I
ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole 3VT3763-.AA56-0AA0
switching units with protected N pole. They have more characte-
ristics with adjustable Ir, tr, Ii and IN.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/17

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current • The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted using one Ir
waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is switch. The Ir switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s rated current,
supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The trip unit
signal of the main circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms is set to one type of characteristic.
value. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits • The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are ad-
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics justed with two switches, Ir and tr. The first ( Ir) switch adjusts
(e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa- the circuit breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves
tors, pulse loading, and the like). along the current axis.
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
overloading. Tripping characteristic of the trip units is indepen- the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The
dent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is attached to the tripping characteristic thus moves along the time axis. Using
switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the the tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics.
adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor
protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines.
Setting the tripping characteristics Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
By changing tr, it is possible to select the trip unit characteris-
The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard tic according to the required motor starting characteristic
3
EN 60947-2. For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the cha- (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting).
racteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines
unit. or transformers. It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is back on immediately after the time-dependent trip unit has
available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip
Electrical Power Distribution). unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The
thermal memory can be disabled by turning the switch from
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal the normal "Tt" position to the "T0" position. In the "T0" position
protection. the time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its ther-
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance mal memory is deactivated. Switching off the thermal memory
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the knowl-
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selecti- edge that there could be rising temperature in the protected
vity of protective devices. For ETU MPS trip units, the delay can device, causing repeated tripping.
be set at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. 2. Delayed time-independent trip unit S
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip
ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time de- units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers.
lay can be set at 0 or 50 ms. It is set up using parameters Isd and tsd. Isd is an n-multiple of
ETU MP and MPS current Ir (Isd= n × Ir). Isd is a short-circuit current that, within the
span of Ii to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker with delay tsd, where tsd
Tripping Adjust - Release Class is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-
M3 10 A independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in
the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least
M8 10
the preset delay time tsd.
M15 20
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
M25 30
unit) I
• For trip units ETU DP, MP and MPS, the time-independent in-
stantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the Ii switch. The Ii switch
is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, when
reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the
circuit breaker.
3/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection
trip units with load • Provides protection for lines with low starting currents
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the The 3VT93..-6AB00 trip unit is intended for the
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the units. The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be di-
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm sabled. The rated currents of the trip units are given by their ar-
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, ticle numbers and correspond to a standardized series of cur-
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is rents (see specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic set at 4 × In.
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of trip- One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because
ping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady less complicated applications.
state is a period during which the characteristic does not Specifications
change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for
at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the Article No. Rated current In Instantaneous short circuit
load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become protection Ii
shorter. A A
3VT9325-6AB00 250 1000 3
NSO0_00355
1.0 3VT9331-6AB00 315 1260
k [-]
3VT9340-6AB00 400 1600
3VT9350-6AB00 500 2000
0.8
3VT9363-6AB00 630 2520
0.6
T
NSO0_00356
10000
0.4
5000 Ir
t [s]
2000
0.2 1000
500
200
0.0 L
50 60 70 80 90 100 100
I [%] 50
Decrease of tripping time with load
20
T - When tripping from the trip unit’s "warm" state, the tripping 10
time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu 5
by coefficient k. In = 250 A
2
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics In = 315 A
1 In = 400 A
For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is tu ≥ 30 min. During 0.5 In = 500 A I
this time, the tripping time tsd is cut short from the cold-state cha- In = 630 A
0.2
In = 500 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
In = 315 A
racteristic by the coefficient k. Ii

0.1
The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd 0.05
Example 0.02
0.01
The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be decreased x In
to:
ts = 0.74 . tsd
k [–] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip units
tsd [s] tripping time of the trip unit, derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit, tripped from warm state
Trip units are preset by the manufacturer
Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
Isd = 0 ms, min
IN = 0.5 Ir
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/19

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Article No. Rated Overload Restart Instantane-
The 3VT93..-6AC00 trip unit is intended for 3VT3763-.AA36- current In protection Ir ous short cir-
cuit
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. Operation of A A protection Ii
the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by tur- 100
ning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). 110
After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains 115
active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED in-
125
dicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows,
the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load 137
larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and just before trip- 144
ping will begin to blink red. 160
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells 3VT9325-6AC00 250 172 T(0) 4 x Ir
for communicating with the signalling unit. 180 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 190
for practical purposes, in order to provide optimal exploitation of
3
200
transformers up to 1.5 Ir.
210
The trip units have simple adjustment of the tripping characteris- 220
tic. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit
tripping level at 4 Ir or 12.5 Ir. 231
243
250
NSO0_00357
10000 Ir 160
min. max.
5000 172
t [s] Ir Ii
2000 180
1000 190
500 200
200 210
100 220
L
50 3VT9340-6AC00 400 231 T(0) 4 x Ir
20 243 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
10 250
In = 250 A
5 In = 400 A 3 3
275
2 In = 630 A
290
1 315
0.5
345
I
0.2 360
0.1 12.5x 12.5x 400
4x 4x Ii
0.05
In = 250 A 250
0.02 260
0.01 275
0.1 12.5x 12.5x
4x 4x 290
0.05
In = 400 A Ii 305
0.02
345
0.01
315
0.1
4x 4x
12.5x 12.5x
360 T(0) 4 x Ir
0.05
In = 630 A Ii 3VT9363-6AC00 630 400 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
0.02
I r = 575 A.630 A ~ I i = 7 kA 435
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 455
xI n 480
500
550
575
630
NSO0_00570
3/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Article No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
• Can protect lines and transformers current protection short circuit
In Ir protection Ii
The 3VT93..-6AP00 trip unit is intended for 3VT3763-.AA36-
A A s kA ms
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation
of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip 100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,32
unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by 110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 0,6
turning a switch located on the front panel from position T(t) to 115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 1,0
position T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal
trip unit remains active. 125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,5 0
137 20 (M 20) T(0) 2,0
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 144 15 (M 15) T(0) 2,5
open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit). 160 8 (M 8) T(0) 3,1
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated 3VT9325-6AP00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 3,75
current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the 180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3,75
short-circuit trip unit can be set to 0 ms or 50 ms. The operational 190 8 (M 8) T(t) 3,1
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green
in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this
200
210
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
T(t)
T(t)
2.5
2,0 50
3
LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. 220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,5
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells 231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 1,0
for communicating with the signalling unit.
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,6
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,32
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set 160 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,5
on the trip unit. Mode "M" provides 4 characteristics suitable for 172 3 (TV 3) T(0) 1,0
protecting motors and in mode "TV" are 4 characteristics for pro- 180 10 (TV 10) T(0) 1,6
tecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic
190 20 (TV 20) T(0) 2,4
can be changed using a selector switch.
200 20 (M 20) T(0) 3,2 0
210 15 (M 15) T(0) 4,0
220 8 (M 8) T(0) 5,0
3VT9340-6AP00 400 231 3 (M 3) T(0) 6,0
243 3 (M 3) T(t) 6,0
250 8 (M 8) T(t) 5,0
275 15 (M 15) T(t) 4,0
290 20 (M 20) T(t) 3,2
NSO0_00571
315 20 (TV 20) T(t) 2,4 50
345 10 (TV 10) T(t) 1,6
360 3 (TV 3) T(t) 1
400 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,5
250 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,8
260 3 (TV 3) T(0) 1,4
275 10 (TV 10) T(0 2
290 20 (TV 20) T(0)) 3 0
305 20 (M 20) T(0) 4
315 15 (M 15) T(0) 5,1
345 8 (M 8) T(0) 6,3
3VT9363-6AP00 630 360 3 (M 3) T(0) 7
400 3 (M 3) T(t) 6,3
435 8 (M 8) T(t) 6,3
455 15 (M 15) T(t) 5,1
480 20 (M 20) T(t) 4
500 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3 50
550 10 (TV 10) T(t) 2
575 3 (TV 3) T(t) 1,4
630 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,8
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/21

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic 3VT9...-6AP00-ETU MP
NSO0_00358
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV min. max.
5000 5000
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500
20
200 200
L tr L tr
100 100
50 20 50
20
20 20 20
15 15
10 In = 250 A
10 10 10 In = 250 A 8 8
5 In = 400 A 5 In = 400 A
3 3 3 3
In = 630 A In = 630 A
2 2
1 1 1 1
3
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 250 A 0.32 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
3.1
3.75 Ii [kA] In=250 A 0.32 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
3.1
3.75 Ii [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 400 A 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0
5.0
6.0 Ii [kA] In=400 A 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0
5.0
6.0 Ii [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 6.3 0.05 6.3
In = 630 A 0.8 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0 Ii [kA] In=630 A 0.8 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0 Ii [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
3/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection, setting timing selectivity
• Provides protection for motors and generators Adjustable specifications
• Can protect lines and transformers
• Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip units Article No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
current protection short circuit
The 3VT93..-6AS00 trip unit is designed for 3VT3763-.AA36- In Ir protection Ii
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation A A S x Ir ms
of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is 100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by tur-
ning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). 110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal tipping func- 115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
tion remains active. 125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the 137 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 144 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit).
160 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated 3VT9325-6AS00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit.
The time delay (tsd) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip 180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
unit at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir is
signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s inter-
190
200
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
T(t)
T(t)
5
7
200
3
val. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode incre-
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
ases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn
red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located on 220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for com- 231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
municating with the signalling unit. 243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 160 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set
on the trip unit. Mode "M" provides 4 characteristics suitable for 172 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
protecting motors, and mode "TV" incorporates 4 characteristics 180 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each charac- 190 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
teristic can be changed with a selector switch.
200 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
210 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
220 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9340-6AS00 400 231 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
243 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
250 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
275 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
290 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
NSO0_00572 315 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
345 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
360 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
400 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
250 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
260 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
275 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
290 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
305 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
315 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
345 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9363-6AS00 630 360 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
400 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
435 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
455 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
480 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
500 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
550 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
575 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
630 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/23

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
3VT93..-6AS00 Tripping characteristics Trip units ETU DPN-distribution protection with protected
NSO0_00359a
N pole
10000 Ir TV • For protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S
min max.
5000 networks
t [s] Ir tr Isd
2000 tsd The 3VT93..-6BC00 trip unit is only intended for the
1000 3VT3763-AA56-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip
500 unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped
200
20 with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch
L on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After disab-
100 10 ling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains
50 active.
20 3
20 The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7.2 Ir,
10 and the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit can be adjus-
5 In = 250 A 10
ted.
In = 400 A 1 tr [s]
2 In = 630 A 3 The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that fla-
S
1 shes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking fre-
1
0.5 quency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than
3 0.2
tsd [ms]
300
200
100
110% of Ir this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just
before tripping. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover
0.1
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit.

3 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.05 I The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN
0.02 0
I sd
switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the
0.01 fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the "OFF"
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 position.
x In
Ir tr I sd tsd In Tripping characteristics
NSO0_00361
10000
1 x Ir
IN = 0.5 x Ir
0.75 x Ir
5000 IN
t [s] IN Ir tr Ii
2000 Ir
min. max.
1000 20
500 N 10
200
3
100
50 1
20
L 20
10
10
5
t r [ S]
2 3
1 I
1
0.5
I n = 250 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
0.2
I n = 400 A
2 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.1 I n = 630 A
0.05
Ii
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
IN Ir tr In Ii
NSO0_00573
3/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Adjustable specifications
Article No. Rated current In Overload protection Ir tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short circuit
protection Ii
A A S x Ir ms
100 1
110 2 0,5
115 3 T(0)
125
137 10
144 4 0,75
160 20
3VT9325-6BC00 250 172
180 20
190 7 1
200 10 T(t)
210
220 3
3
231 9 OFF
243 1
250
160 1
172 2 0,5
180 3 T(0)
190
200 10
210 4 0,75
220 20
3VT9340-6BC00 400 231
243 20
250 7 1
275 10 T(t)
290
315 3
345 9 OFF
360 1
400
250 1
260 2 0,5
275 3 T(0)
290
305 10
315 4 0,75
345 20
3VT9363-6BC00 630 360
400 20
435 7 1
455 10 T(t)
480
500 3
550 9 OFF
575 1
630
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/25

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
■ Overview
Article number according to contact arrangement
Arrangement Article No. Number of contacts Contact types
of contacts
01 3VT9300-2AC10 1 NO
20 3VT9300-2AE10 2 NC
01 3VT9300-2AD10 1 NC
02 3VT9300-2AG10 2 NO
11 3VT9300-2AF10 1+1 NC + NO
001 3VT9300-2AH10 1 NC + NO

accessory compartments
3 Accessory
compartment
Switch name Switch function
1 Signalling Signal to indicate the state of the circuit

breaker by the trip unit
2 Relative Relative to indicate tripping of the circuit
breaker by trip units, TEST pushbutton or
by OFF pushbutton on the motorized ope-
rating mechanism
3, 4, 5, (6 ... 9)1) Auxiliary Auxiliary to indicate the position of the
main contacts
10 Leading Leading to make/break in advance of the
main contacts
1)
Accessory compartments 6 ... 9 for 4-pole version only.
3/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
■ Function
State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment
Switches
early contact signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
10.Y1
10.Y3
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
3VT9300-2AJ00
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
or or
2.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
7.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
8.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
9.2 3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9300-2AE10
3.4 3VT9300-2AF10
3
10.Y2
or or
10.Y4
NSO0_00362a
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
6.4
6.1
7.4
7.1
9.4
9.1
1.4
1.2
1.1
3.4
3.1
4.4
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.1
8.4
8.1
acc.c. No. 10 acc.c. No. 1 acc.c. No. 2 acc.c. No. 3 acc.c. No. 4 acc.c. No. 5 acc.c. No. 2 + 3 acc.c. No. 6 acc.c. No. 7 acc.c. No. 8 acc.c. No. 9
Article No. 3VT9300-2A.10 3VT9300-2A.201) 3VT9300-2AJ00 3VT9300-2AH10 3VT9300-2AH201)
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 500 AC 5 ... 60 AC 250 AC 24 ...250 AC 5 ..60
DC 60 ... 500 DC 5 ... 60 DC 24 ...250 DC 5 ...60
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500 250
• AC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V -- -- --
• AC-15 6 A/240 V,4 A/400 V, -- 1 A/AC 250 V 1.5 A/AC 250 V --
2 A/500 V
• DC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V -- -- 0.01 A/DC 60 V
• DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.01/60 V -- 0.2 A/DC 250 V --
0.2 A/500 V
Thermal current Ith A 10 0.5 -- 6 0.5
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 02, 11, 20 001
(connected switch)
1) 3VT9300-2A.20 is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/27

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Article number of shunt trip units
Ue Article No.
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9300-1SC00
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1SD00
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 3VT9300-1SE00
Article number of undervoltage trip units

Ue Article No.
AC 24,40 48 V 3VT9300-1UC00
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9300-1UD00
3 AC 230,400,500/DC 220 V 3VT9300-1UE00
The particular rated operating voltage of the trip unit is set up by

jumpers located in the trip unit. Default setting is always the
maximum value.
■ Function
Shunt trip units
Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker
NSO0_00364
Main contacts Circuit breaker state Lever positions of circuit breakers

Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
compartment
button or by the tripping pushbutton

accessory
5.4 5.3 20 located on the operating mechanism

4.4 4.3 1
3…5
3.4 3.3 20
Auxiliary switch by operating mechanism
5.2 5.1 30
4.2 4.1 1
3.2 3.1 L+
0
Relative switch
compartment
accessory
20
1
2.4 2.3
2
0
3VT9300-1S.00
Relative switch
C1
Reaction time of the shunt trip

30
1
2.2 2.1
0
t [ms] U 1
0
NSO0_00518a
>50
NSO0_00583
C2
1
OK
0
N- t [ms]
3/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit
Circuit breaker state Lever positions of circuit breakers
NSO0_00365
Main contacts Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5 Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
0
Auxiliary switch button or by the trip pushbutton on
compartment
the motorized operating mechanism
accessory
5.4 5.3 30
1
3…5
4.4 4.3 Switched off manually or electrically
3.4 3.3
0 by operating mechanism
Auxiliary switch
5.2 5.1 30 Arrangement, number and type of contacts
4.2 4.1 1
3.2 3.1
0 Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types
Relative switch
compartment
2 2 NC
accessory
30
1 11 1+1 NC + NO
2.4 2.3
2
0
Relative switch
30
20
L+ L+
2 NO
3
1
2.2 2.1
0
Early switch
compartment
accessory
20
1
3VT9300-1U.00
D1
10.Y1
D1
10
3VT9300-1U.10
10.Y2 10.Y1
10.Y4 10.Y3
Early switch Reaction time of the undervoltage trip unit
20
10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3
0 U< U< 1
t [ms]
0
NSO0_00519a
10.Y2 >50
I201_18897
D2
D2
The 4th pole contact closes earlier than, and opens later than the 1
OK
main contacts 0
N- N- t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker
Shunt trip units Undervoltage trip units
Article No. 3VT9300-1S.00 Article No. 3VT9300-1U.00 3VT9300-1U.101)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA < 3 VA
DC <3W DC <3W <3W
Functional description U ≥ 0,7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip Functional description U 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker can switch on)
Time to switch-off ms 20 U 0.35 Ue
Continuous load Yes (the circuit breaker must trip)
Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1 Time to switched-off ms 20
Terminal protection IP20 Continuous load Yes
(connected trip unit) Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 11)
Location in accessory com- 10 Terminal protection IP20
partment No. (connected trip)
compartment No.
Earl switch --
Rated operating voltage Ue V -- AC 250
Rated frequency fn Hz -- 50/60
Rated operating current Ie/Ue V -- AC 1 A/AC 250
Arrangement of contacts -- 02, 11, 20
Connector cross-section S mm2 -- 0.5 ... 11)
Terminal protection -- IP20
1)
Cannot be used in combination with motorized operating mechanism
3VT9300-3M..0.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/29

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocking and mechanical interlocking for pa-
rallel switching
The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms
are required: • Mechanical interlocking for fixed-mounted versions require
the following components:
• To switch the switching unit: - 2 x 3VT9300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HE10 or 3VT9300-3HE20 black knob - 2 x 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9300-3HF20 red knob
• Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is intended for
• To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
door:
- 3VT9300-3HJ..extension shaft • Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the follow-
- 3VT9300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling oper- ing components:
ating mechanism - 2 x 3VT9300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob - 1 x 3VT9300-3HE/HF.. knob
■ Design
3 The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the
circuit breaker:
Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. 1)
Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob + 3VT9300-3HJ.. extension shaft
Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet
3VT9300-3HC/HD10.. rotary operating mechanism
Enhanced safety for operator:
Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver • The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to
and knob lock the circuit breaker in position "switched off manually". The
unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be
locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm
circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch machi-
• Each coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism
nes on and off. The modular concept of the operating mecha-
prevents the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit
nisms makes allows simple mounting on the switching unit after
breaker is in on-state or after tripping. Types 3VT9300-3HG10
the accessory compartment cover is removed. The operating
and 3VT9300-3HG20 prevent the cabinet door from being
mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately
opened when the circuit breaker is in the state "switched off
(see page 3/6).
manually" and when the rotary operating mechanism knob is
• The rotary operating mechanism is fixed right on the switching locked out.
unit of the circuit breaker. • Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be
• The rotary operating mechanism coupling driver is fixed onto provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel me-
the switchgear door and it provides protection IP40 or IP66. chanical switching (see page 3/32).
• The rotary operating mechanism knob is placed on the rotary
operated mechanism unit or on the rotary operating mecha-
nism coupling driver
• The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjust-
able length 245 ... 410 mm).
3/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Features
Article No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length in
lock the circuit brea- protection when circuit breaker is mm
ker in OFF mode
manually and
locked
3VT9300-3HB20 Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HC10 Rotary operating mechanism gray no -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism gray no -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HE20 Knob black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9300-3HF20 Knob red yes -- -- -- --
3
3VT9300-3HG20 Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9300-3HH30 Coupling driver yellow IP40 yes yes --
3VT9300-3HH20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9300-3HJ10 Extension shaft, can be shortened -- -- -- -- -- 365
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/31

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Function
3VT9300-8LA00 mechanical interlocking 3VT9300-8LB00 mechanical parallel switching
Mechanical interlocking make sure that two circuit breakers can-

not trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit
Mechanical interlocking for parallel switching are for simultane-
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can
ous switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be
be used between two 3VT3 circuit breakers or between one
used between two 3VT3 circuit breakers or between 3VT3 and
3VT3 and one 3VT2 circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must
3VT2 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished
3 be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of
them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob).
with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with
a knob.
When using a mechanical interlocking it is required to comply
When using a mechanical interlocking for parallel switching it is
with the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table.
required to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and
in the table.
1 3 5
L
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
X X
TEST TEST
NSO0_00234
NSO0_00233
Left Right switching unit Left Right switching unit

switching switching
3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3 3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3
unit unit
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole1)
X L X L X L X L X L X L X L X L
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
3VT2, 3P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2, 3P 105+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT2, 4P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2, 4P 105+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT3, 3P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3, 3P 122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT3, 4P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3, 4P 122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 x x
1)
Switching unit 3VT3, 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00235
3/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

3VT9.00-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking with bowden wire • Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both trip simulta-
neously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers
may be turned off simultaneously.
• 3VT9300-8LC10 mechanical interlocking is intended for two
3VT3 circuit breakers. 3VT9300-8LC20 interlocking is in-
tended for one 3VT3 circuit breaker and one 3VT2.
• Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Article No. of mechanical 3VT9300-8LC10 3VT9300-8LC20

interlocking
Circuit breaker types 3VT3 3VT2
3VT3 3VT3
Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear

assemblies
3
Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use",
which is available on our website:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/product-support.
NSO0_00366
148
0
ON ON
=4
0 ... 700
min
OFF OFF
R
45
TEST TEST
30 min. 80
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/33

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off
position using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter
max. 4.3 mm.
• A 3VT9300-3MF20 cover can be attached to the ON-OFF
switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then
sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the
circuit breaker from the drive panel.
• Extension cable 3VT9300-3MF00 has a connector on one side
that connects to the connector located on the motor mecha-
• It is used for remote control of the circuit breaker (switch nism and conductors on the other side that connect, for exam-
off/on). ple, to a terminal block.
• Simple mounting on the circuit breaker after the circuit breaker • Front panel state indicating device of the stored energy sig-
cover of cavities is removed. nals the state of motor drive storage devices. The state can be
• Usage in industrial applications e.g. switching of stand by signalled from a distance.
units etc. or wherever the automatic operation of electric de- • Motor drive can be sealed means of bolt sealing
vices is needed. 3VT9200-8BN00
3 • In order to speed up the circuit breaker‘s switch off (e.g. safety
STOP button) the undervoltage release or shunt trip can be
used.
Article No. 3VT9300-3M.00
• On the motor drive front panel there is a change-over switch
to select the drive modes AUTO/MANUAL: Operational voltage Ue AC V 24 ,48, 110, 230
- AUTO mode - remote control. The circuit breaker is con- DC V 24, 48, 110, 220
trolled by buttons for remote switch off/on, furthermore in this Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
position mechanical control can be used on the front panel Control pulse length for storing ms 400 ∞1)
of the motor drive.
Control pulse length
- MANUAL mode - manual control. Control voltage is not
needed. The circuit breaker can be switched on using the for switching on ms 20 ... 700 1)
green switch on button and switched off using the red switch for switching off ms 400 ...∞1)
off button on the front part of the drive cover. Electric switch Time before switching on ms < 60
on is blocked. Electric switch off is functional. The accumu-
lation of energy can be done by means of hinged lever. Time before switching off ms 900
• Possibility to indicate remotely the state of the AUTO/MANUAL Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 3 contact making/min
switch. Frequency of cycles - instant suc- 10 contact making
• In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the cessive ON/OFF cycles
green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the Mechanical endurance 20000 contact making
motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the re-
mote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out, Input power AC VA 100
DC W 100
whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains
active for safety reasons. Protection
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir- • AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V 5SX4104-7; 5SX4102-7
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first • DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V 5SX5104-7; 5SX5102-7
position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is
tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage Rated operating current V AC 5 A/250
AUTO / MANUAL switches Ie/Ue DC 0.5 A/250
trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit
breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated
to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The Article No. 3VT9300-3MF00
motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by perma- Number of conductors 12
nent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit Conductor cross sections S mm2 0.35
breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch
the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse. Conductor lengths cm 60
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to con- 1) For sequence of control pulses, see page 3/35.
trol the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN-
UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage
unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging
the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to
switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons lo-
cated on the front panel of the motor mechanism.
• The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to
indicate what state the 3VT3 motor mechanism unit storage is
in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on.
The 3VT3 motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate
the storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the ter-
minal strip. 3VT motor mechanism have optional designs,
alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
• The motorized operating mechanism can be furnished with an
electromechanical operations counter that may be installed in
the drive cover or outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the
switchgear door). A metal holder included in the scope of sup-
ply of the external operations counter. Connecting is facilitated
with connectors.
3/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Function
Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating
mechanism – electricaly by pushbutton ON mechanism- electricaly by pushbutton OFF
NSO0_00368
NSO0_00369
2 1 50 2 1 900
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
compartment
compartment
5.4 5.3 50 900
accessory
accessory
5.4 5.3
4.4 4.3 1 4.4 4.3 1
3…5
3…5
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3
0 0
5.2 5.1 50 5.2 5.1 900
4.2 4.1 1 4.2 4.1 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
3
compartment
compartment
accessory
accessory
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
2
2
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
compartment
compartment
20 900
accessory
accessory
1 1
10
10
10.Y2 10.Y1 0 10.Y2 10.Y1

0
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y4 10.Y3
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y1 1 10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3 10.Y4 10.Y3
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Wiring diagram Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker

Switched on
Motor drive control circuits
Q3
L+ button or by the trip pushbutton on the
ON Switched off manually or electrically by
S the operating mechanism
B OFF
Motor drive
Symbol Description
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
MP Motorized operating mechanism 3VT9300-3M..0
M Motor
NC NO NO X4 Connector for external operations counter
S6 NC M P S5 Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
C C
S5 S6 Switching indicating energy storage
(ready to on: NO-C)
YC External operations counter 3VT9300-3MF10
B recommended wiring of the control circuits
MP (not included in delivery)
NSO0_00370
ON Make pushbutton
11 8 6 2 2 1 OFF Break pushbutton
X3 X4
S Switch for energy storage
PE N- (switched on = automatic storage, may be
YC continuously switched on)
Operations Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/35

© Siemens AG 2014

Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motorized operating mecha- Wiring diagram
nism by the trip unit (switch S – automatic spring charging)
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
(electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit
NSO0_00527
Main contacts
2 1 20 Control circuit
4 3 1
6 5 Q3
0
Auxiliary switch L+
compartment
accessory
20
1 ON
3.4 3.3 20
3
0 S
Auxiliary switch OFF
B
30
1
3.2 3.1 Motor drive
0
Relative switch
compartment
D1
C1
accessory
20 650
1
3VT9300-1U.00
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9300-1S.00
2.4 2.3
2
0
3
Relative switch
30 650
1 NC NO
2.2 2.1
0 NC NO
Early switch or
U< U
compartment
S6 S5 M P
accessory
20 650 C C
1
1.4 1.3
1
0
Early switch
30 650
1 MP
NSO0_00371a
1.2 1.1
0
t [ms]
D2
11
C2
8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J
Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha- acc.c. No.10
nism by a shunt trip unit or undercurrent trip unit (switch S – PE N- YC N-
automatic spring charging) Operations
counter
NSO0_00242
Main contacts
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
2 1 20
4 3 1 (electrical ON signal) and switched off by undervoltage trip unit
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch Motor drive control circuits
compartment
20 Q3
accessory
1 L+
3.4 3.3 20
0
3
Auxiliary switch
ON
20 S
1 OFF
3.2 3.1 B
0
Relative switch
compartment
30 520 Motor drive

accessory
1
2.4 2.3
D1
C1
0
2
Relative switch
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1S.00
30 520
1
2.2 2.1
0
NC NO
t [ms]
NC NO
S6 S5 or
M P U< U
C C
MP
NSO0_00372a
C2
D2
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J
acc.c. No. 10
PE N- N-
YC
Operations
counter
3/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Recommended actuating pulses Description of charts
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha- Symbol Description
nism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging)
HK Main contacts
or open
PS Auxiliary switch
50 RS Relative switch
HK 1 R OFF Circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit

0 IMP S Pulse to charge spring mechanism
520 > 880 IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
RS 1 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
0 X Random segment of time
NSO0_00246a
> 1400
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0 Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers
t [ms]
R OFF Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers
3
Switched on

trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha- Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
nism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) motorized operating mechanism
50 the operating mechanism
HK 1
0
520 > 880

RS 1
0
NSO0_00246a
> 1400
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF

trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism -
switch S closed only for storing
50
HK 1
0
X + 520 > 880

RS 1
0
> 100
NSO0_00247a
X > 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP S IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/37

© Siemens AG 2014

Use of 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism in the Recommended control pulses for switching the 3VT3 circuit
automatic standby system breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after Circuit
breaker was switched off by a shunt trip unit or by an undervol-
Wiring diagram of the motorized operating mechanism of the tage trip unit in the automatic standby system
circuit breaker
Control circuit
NSO0_00080
Q3
> 1400
L+ 200 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
ON
S 50
B OFF 1
HK
0
Motor drive 520 > 880

RS 1
B1
A1
3 X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5 20
200
3VT9300-1U.00
3VT9300-1S.00
SV 1
0
NC NO
NC NO
SP 1
S6 S5 or 0
M P U< U t [ms]
C C
NSO0_00081
> 100
MP 400 … ∞ 200 … 700
1
NSO0_00079a
IMP S IMP ON
0
A2
B2
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 J 50
X > 1400
acc.c. 10 1
PE N - N- HK
YC 0
Cycle
counter X + 520 > 880
RS 1
0
Symbol Description 20
>200
M Motor SV 1
0
X3 Connector for connection of control circuits
X4 Connector for external cycle counter SP 1
0
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL
(NC-C) mode t [ms]
YC External 3VT9300-3MF10 cycle counter
B Recommended connection of control circuits
(is not included in the motor drive supply) Symbol Description
ON Pushbutton HK Main contacts
OFF Pushbutton RS Relative switch
S Switch for storage (closed = automatic storage; SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
it can be closed permanently) SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating IMP ON Motorized operating mechanism make pulse
mechanism
IMP OFF Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse
In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical (generated by S switch)
interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch Switched on
the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a
standby circuit breaker may fail.
Switched off by trip units, TEST or INSPECTION pushbut-
ton
Switched off manually or by motorized operating

mechanism electrically (wound up state)
3/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
■ Overview
Plug-in bases Position signalling
The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four swit-

ches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the con-
nected/removed position.
States of 3VT9300-4WL00 switches in plug-in base
according to the circuit breaker position
3
Accessory compartment 11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)
3VT9200-4PA30 Locking plug-in base against Circuit breaker position 1 1
plug-in base inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector
The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is 2 4 2 4
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid ex-
Inserted 0 1
change of the circuit breaker is needed.
Removed 1 0
• The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assem-
bling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug-in design 0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed
from the original fixed-mounted version 1)
• The components of the plug-in base are:
- supporting part of the plug-in base Technical specifications
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the Article No. 3VT9300-4WL00
switching unit
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off AC 250
of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting and removal)
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
mounting bolts is used that is included in delivery of the Rated operational current Ie/Ue
3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
AC-13 3 A/AC 400 V
Main circuit DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
• The 3VT9300-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting Thermal current Ith A 6
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of
supply of the 3VT3 of switching unit , 3 pole
• for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect- Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
ing sets (see page 3/9) Terminal protection IP20
• connections must comply with our recommendations (see (connected switch)
page 3/45).
A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plug-
Auxiliary circuits in mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on
page 3/14.
Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism

These are connected using a 15-wire 3VT9300-4PL00 cable.
Coding
Circuit breaker in plug-in version with motorized operating mechanism
The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a
coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker
into the plug-in base.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/39

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design
with motorized operating mechanism Symbol Description
Motor drive control circuits
M Motor
Q3 P Energy storage device
L+
X3 Terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter
ON
S
OFF S6 Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
B
Motor drive B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not
included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
ON Make pushbutton
OFF Break pushbutton
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
S Switch to store energy
3
AC 24V 5SX4104-7
AC 48V 5SX4104-7
AC 110V 5SX4104-7
NC NO NO AC 230V 5SX4102-7
S6 NC M P DC 24V 5SX5104-7
C C DC 48V 5SX5104-7
S5 DC 110V 5SX5104-7
DC 220V 5SX5102-7
Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating

mechanism
MP
• Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend
turning first of all the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the
X3
11 8 6 2 2
X4
1 motorized operating mechanism to the MANUAL position
• More operating information is available in the operating
PE N- instructions
YC • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
NSO0_00350
Operating mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
counter successfully switch on at the first attempt.
Recommended process of manipulation

After every manipulation with circuit breaker in plug-in design
it is necessary to accomplish the operations in following se-
quence, after repeated insertation into the plug-in device:
1) press the switch off button (red) on the

motor operating mechanism
2) press the switch on button (green) on
the motor operating mechanism
1 2
3/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

for plug-in version
Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker before removing State of switches before removing State of switches after removing
inserted position → withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3, 4, 5 1 2 3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1) (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AH10
the circuit breaker
Lever position of
main contacts
State of the
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Manually switched off or switched off by

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 3
Switched off from switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton
or by OFF pushbutton located on the motorized
operating mechanism

1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 are for 4-pole version only.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/41

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Design
Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling
The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for si-

gnalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
Technical specifications
3 Article No.
Rated operational voltage Ue V
3VT9300-4WL00
AC 400
AC 250
Circuit breaker installed 3VT9300-4WA30 Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-discon- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of AC-13 3 A/AC 400 V
the circuit are needed. DC-15 0.15 A/DC 250 V, 3 A/DC 125 V,
4 A/DC 30 V
• The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to
convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixed- Thermal current Ith A 6
mounted version to withdrawable version. Arrangement of contacts 001
• The components of the withdrawable version are: Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
- withdrawable version base Terminal protection IP20
- 2 movable side plates (connected switch)
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the
switching unit For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable device
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off with accessories, see page 3/14.
of the circuit breaker when handling, inserting and withdraw- States of 3VT9300-4WL00 switches in withdrawable version
ing) according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
- a set of mounting bolts needed to fasten the withdrawable
version mounting base into the switchboard State of switch Accessory compartment
Main circuit 11 ... 14 15,17 16, 18
(19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
• The 3VT9300-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in delivery of the Circuit breaker and lockout 1 1 1
position
3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
• For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect- 2 4 2 4 2 4
ing sets (see page 3/9) Inserted and unlocked 0 1 1 0 0 1
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda-
tions (see page 3/45). 0 1 1 0 1 0
Withdrawn and unlocked 1 0 0 1 0 1
Auxiliary circuits
1 0 0 1 1 0
Removed and unlocked 1 0 1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 0

These are connected using the 3VT9300-4PL00 15-wire cable. 1)
Coding • Operating state is always in locked-out position
3VT9300-4WN00 coding set • In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for
more detailed information, see "Advantages and
enhanced safety for operator").
The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker

can be provided with coding set, which prevents inserting ano-
ther circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting
base.
3/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Locking Wiring diagram description
Symbol Description
M Motor
X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter
S6 Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits
not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
ON Make pushbutton
Locking the circuit breaker Locking the withdrawable version S Switch to charge spring mechanism
in withdrawable version
base against tampering
base against inserting the circuit
breaker Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism
AC 24V 5SX4104-7
3
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism AC 48V 5SX4104-7
AC 110V 5SX4104-7
AC 230V 5SX4102-7
DC 24V 5SX5104-7
DC 48V 5SX5104-7
DC 110V 5SX5104-7
DC 220V 5SX5102-7
Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker

• Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the mo-
version with motorized operating mechanism torized operating mechanism to MANUAL position
• More operating information is available in the operating
Motor drive control circuits instructions
Q3 • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
L+ mended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully turn on at the first attempt.
ON
S
OFF
B
Motor drive
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
NC NO NO
S6 NC M P
C C
S5
MP
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4
PE N-
YC
NSO0_00350
Operating
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/43

© Siemens AG 2014

Changes in states of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position
Circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion
- withdrawn position → - inserted position
Circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal
- inserted position → - withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3, 4, 5 (6 ... 9)1) 1 2 3,4,5 (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
Lever position of circuit
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
breaker
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
3 Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Manually switched off or by 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

operating mechanism
Switched off from switched-on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

state: by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF push-
button on the motorized operating
mechanism

1) Accessory compartments 6 to 9 are for 4-pole version only.
3/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers for circuit • Terminals 2, 4, 6
breakers and switch disconnectors - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the
the power supply with terminals 2, 4, 6 and if Ue = AC 415 V,
Fixed-mounted version it is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers or
Front connection a 3VT9300-8CB30 terminal cover.
• Terminals 1, 3, 5 - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main
- If Ue = AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections
insulating barriers or 3VT9300-8CB30 terminal covers. are not used, then it is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 in-
- For the connection of the main circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, insulating barriers or 3VT9300-8CB30 terminal covers.
sulated conductors, flexibars or rear connection terminals Rear connection
are not used. It is necessary to use 3VT9300-8CE30 insulat- • Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be
ing barriers or 3VT9300-8CB30 terminal cover. used.
Plug-in and withdrawable versions
Deionization Spaces Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used.
B = 105 C = 80
3
1 1
D
1 3VT9300-8CE30
A2
100 … 150
A1
A
B=0 C=0
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
ON ON ON
275
OFF OFF OFF
TEST TEST TEST

NSO0_00259a
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
20
B = 20
140 140 140 B = 20
A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-

disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for con-
necting using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with rear
connection)
A1 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9300-8CE30 insulating barriers from 100 mm to max.
150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors
with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 Minimum distance:
• between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsula-
ted earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and
busbars)
• between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors situated ver-
tically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/
switch-disconnectors above one another
B, C Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-discon-
nector and uninsulated earthed wall
D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/45

© Siemens AG 2014

D
NSO0_00260a
Busbar
max. 3 mm
> 15 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
AC Ue 230 V 415 V 500 V 690 V

3VT3 H wired with Ik 1) ≤ 100 kA > 36 ... 65 kA ≤ 36 kA > 20 ... 35 kA ≤ 20 kA > 15 ... 20 kA ≤ 15 kA
3VT3 N wired with Ik ≤ 60 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 20 kA ≤ 10 kA ≤ 15 kA
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
3
C < 80 mm
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 150 200 100 200 150 150 150
A2 (mm) 250 300 200 300 250 250 250
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 30 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
C ≥ 80 mm D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
1)
Ik = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms).
3/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014


45 45 103
150 ... < AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 6
18
75.5
1 3 5
45
4 x Ø 6.5
60
60
ON
25°
194
17°
154
194
201
234
259
275
65
2°
33
OFF
TEST R 94
134.5
NSO0_00507
2 4 6
45.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20
33 105 47.5 45 47.5
140 117 5
Drilling pattern
Fixed-mounted version, front connection with 3VT9324-4TF30, 3VT9315-4TF30 connecting set
42 28
45 45 25
1 3 5
45
ON
194
234
275
298
344
369
269
319
435
OFF
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00261
32
140 Ø 22 Ø 22 3VT9324-4TF30
Ø 18 Ø 18 3VT9315-4TF30
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/47

© Siemens AG 2014

60
45 45 49
34 38
34 26
45
ON
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
251
274
297
435
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00262
11
25
140 6 x Ø 8.4
105
3
45 45 53 105
9
11.5
26
6
20
45
60 4 x Ø 5 (M 5 x 25)
ON
234
194
234
154
194
275
65
OFF
TEST
2.5
Ø 11
R
7
NSO0_00264
25
35
140 40.5 45
20.5
45
125
3/48 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9300-4ED30 connecting set)
45 45 31 6
19.5
45
ON
194
234
275
314
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00267
Ø 13
32
32
12.5
50 50
140
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9300-4EE30 connecting set)
45 45 3 31 6
16.5
25
45
140
ON
194
234
275
308
OFF
TEST
2 x Ø 11
NSO0_00269
56.5
15 25
32 32
70 70
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/49

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism
60 1
1 3VT3
NSO0_00271a
2 3VT9300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
2
3
37
51
TEST
143
2 4 6
3
°
90
25° 140 50
1 2
NSO0_00273a
1 3VT3
2 3VT9300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 5 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70 4 4 3VT9300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
3
5 3VT9300-3HJ.0
37
70
cabinet door
51
TEST
143
2 4 6
6
°
90
25° 140
180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
min. 100 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00275
55
3/50 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, with 3VT9300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
275
AUTO
204
TEST
149
92
NSO0_00276
2 4 6
3
140 247 31
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter

1
14
ax
m
R
NSO0_00332
27
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/51

© Siemens AG 2014


3VT9300-4PA30 plug-in base Drilling patterns
25 6
45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
1 3 5
45
358
234
284
342
277
277
166
194
166
317
L R
3 Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00279
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5 45 47.5
33 35
140 105
Plug-in version, 3VT9300-8CB30 motorized operating mechanism
1 3 5 105
518
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00283
140 35
70
103
3/52 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version
ON
358
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00285
140 105
140
157
187
Plug-in version, rear connection with 3VT9300-4RC30 connecting set

Drilling pattern
3
53
9
26
6
20
4 x Ø 6.5
67
ON
317
317
166
OFF
TEST
58
Ø 11
96
25
35
NSO0_00287
40.5 105 45
3
20.5
45 47.5
125
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/53

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version, with rotary operating mechanism
TEST
3
NSO0_00290
175
225
Plug-in version, with 3VT9300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
1 3 5
MANUAL
AUTO
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00292
282 31
3/54 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014


3VT9300-8CB30 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern
25 6
45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
1 3 5
45
234
358
284
342
277
166
194
277
317
166
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
3
2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00298
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5
33 35
Withdrawable version base, with 3VT9300-8CB30 terminal cover

215
204
1 3 5 105
518
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00302
140 35
214 70
103
140 27.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/55

© Siemens AG 2014

Operating position Checking position
213 30
124
124
1 3 5 65
ON
358
140
140
OFF
TEST
3 2 4 6
NSO0_00304
140 105 105
215 140 170
157 187
187 217
Withdrawable version, rear connection with 3VT9300-4RC30 connecting set

Withdrawable design, rear connection
(connecting set CS-BH-A021) Operating position Checking position
3
213 53 105
9
26
6
20
4xØ6.5
67
1 3 5
65
ON
317
317
358
166
PS
SP PS
SV PS
PS OFF PS
TEST
2 4 6
58
Ø11
96
NSO0_00307
25
35
140 45
3
20.5
215 53 140 45 47.5

125
3/56 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism
30
124
124
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00309
175 205
225 255
Withdrawable version, with motorized operating mechanism

30
124
124
1 3 5
MANUAL
AUTO
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00312
282 31 312 31
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/57

© Siemens AG 2014


45 45 45 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 6
18
75.5
N 1 3 5
45
4 x Ø 6.5
60
60
ON 25°
194
17°
154
194
201
234
259
275
65
2°
33
OFF
TEST R 94
134.5
NSO0_00319
N 2 4 6 45.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20
33 105 92.5 45 47.5
185 117 5

with 3VT9324-4TF30 + 3VT9324-4TF00, 3VT9315-4TF30 + 3VT9315-4TF00 connecting set
42 28
45 45 45 25
45
ON
194
234
275
298
344
369
269
319
435
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00322
32
Ø 22 Ø 22 (-3HJ10)
Ø 18 Ø 18 (-3HJ20)
105
3/58 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, front connection with 3VT9303-4TF30 + 3VT9303-4TF00 connecting set
38 11
11
45 45 45 26
45
ON
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
251
274
297
435
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00324
25
11
185 6 x Ø 8.5
105
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection with 3VT9300-4RC30 + 3VT9300-4RC00 connecting set
3
53 105
9
11.5
26
6
20
45
60 4 x Ø 6.5
ON
234
194
234
154
194
275
65
OFF
TEST
2.5
Ø 11
R
7
NSO0_00326
25
35
185 40.5
20.5
45 45 40 7.5
170
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/59

© Siemens AG 2014

105 1
1 3VT3
NSO0_00272
2 3VT9300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
2
3
37
51
TEST
N 2 4 6 143
3
°
90
25° 140 50
Fixed-mounted version, with door-coupling operating mechanism
1 2
1 3VT3
NSO0_00274
2 3VT9300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 5 3 3VT9300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70 4 4 3VT9300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
3
5 3VT9300-3HJ.0
37
70
cabinet door
51
TEST
143
N 2 4 6
6
°
90
25° 140
180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
min. 145 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00329
55
3/60 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
204
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
149
92
NSO0_00330
3
247 31
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter

1
14
ax
m
R
NSO0_00332
27
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/61

© Siemens AG 2014


3VT9300-4PA40 plug-in base
Drilling patterns
25 6
45 45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
N 1 3 5
45
234
284
342
277
277
166
194
358
166
317
3
L R
3
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00333
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5 45
33 35
185 105
Plug-in base, with 3VT9300-8CB40 terminal cover
N 1 3 5 105
L R
518
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00336
185 35
70
103
3/62 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version
ON
358
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00337
185 105
140
157
187
Plug-in version, rear connection with 3VT9300-4RC30 + 3VT9300-4RC00 connecting set

Drilling pattern
3
53
9
26
6
20
67
ON
317
358
OFF
166
TEST 4 x Ø 6.5
58
Ø 11
96
NSO0_00338
25
35
185 40.5 105 45

3
20.5
45 47.5
170
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/63

© Siemens AG 2014

Plug-in version with rotary operating mechanism
358
TEST
3
NSO0_00339
185 175
225
Plug-in version, with 3VT9300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
N 1 3 5
358
MANUAL
AUTO
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00293
185 282 31
3/64 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014


3VT9300-4WA40 withdrawable version base
Drilling pattern
258 25 6
45 45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
179
N 1 3 5
45
358
234
284
342
277
166
166
194
317
L R
3
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00340
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5
33 35
185 105
260
Withdrawable version with 3VT9300-8CB40 terminal cover

204
N 1 3 5 105
140
L R
518
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00342
185 35
260 70
103
140 27.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/65

© Siemens AG 2014

258 30
124
124
65
ON
358
140
140
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00344
185 105 105
260 140 170
157 187
187 217
Withdrawable version, rear connection with 3VT9300-4RC30 + 3VT9300-4RC00 connecting set

Drilling pattern
3
258 53 105
9
26
6
20
67
65
ON
358
317
166
OFF
TEST 4 x Ø 6.5
58
Ø 11
96
NSO0_00345
25
35
185 45
3
20.5
260 53 140 45 47.5

170
3/66 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism
258 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00347
185 175 205
260 225 255
Withdrawable version, with 3VT9300-3M.. motorized operating mechanism

258 30
124
124
65
MANUAL
AUTO
358
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00348
185 282 31 312 31

260

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 3/67
© Siemens AG 2014

Notes
3/68 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

4
© Siemens AG 2014

up to 1000 A
Catalog
up to 1000 A
4/2 General data
4/5 Manual/motorized operating
mechanisms

up to 1000 A
4/9 Trip units
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switching unit 9
10
11
4
1
12
26
16
14 15
13
Accessories
NSO0_00228b
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Molded case circuit breaker 10 Rotary operating mechanism 19 Extension cable

2 Multiple box terminals 11 Mechanical interlocking 20 Terminal cover
3 Box terminals 12 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 21 Terminal cover
4 Circular conductor terminal 13 Motor operating mechanism 22 Insulating barriers
5 Multiple feed-in terminal 14 Shunt trip unit 23 Insulating barriers
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 15 Undervoltage trip unit 24 Insulating grommets
7 Rear connection 16 Auxiliary switch 25 Mounting bolts
8 Front connection 17 Lockingtype lever 26 Withdrawable version base
9 Rear connection 18 Sealing inset
4/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
■ Overview
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3-pole switching unit (fixed-
• 3VT9500-8CE30 insulating barriers mounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is availa-
ble with a choice of different characteristics.
• connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be outfitted with:
• a trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixed-
mounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector
• 3VT9410-6DT00 switch disconnector unit unit.
For the withdrawable version, the 3VT4710-3AA38-0AA0
switching unit requires
• 3VT9500-4WA30 withdrawable version base.
The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 2 x 3VT9500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
- 3VT9500-4RD30 (rear connection)
• We recommend fitting the switching unit with:
- 3VT9500-4SA40 mounting bolts set (4 x M8 x 60)

Rated current In Breaking capacity Icu (AC 415 V) DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
P. unit per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
Fixed-mounted version, 3-pole
4
1000 55 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 1 unit 19.860
Withdrawable version, 3-pole

1000 55 3VT4710-3AA38-0AA0 1 unit 23.000

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/3
© Siemens AG 2014


Rated cur- Set current of the S function short- Operating current DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
rent In inverse- time circuit protection of the instantane- P. unit per PU
delayed overload (short-time ous short-curcuit approx.
trip units "L" Ir delayed) "S" Isd releases "I" Ii
A A A kg
Electronic trip units (ETU)
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function
• Provides protection for lines and transformers
315 125 ... 315 500 ... 5000 3VT9431-6AC00 1 unit 0.464
630 250 ... 630 800 ... 10000 3VT9463-6AC00 1 unit 0.464
800 315 ... 800 1000 ... 12000 3VT9480-6AC00 1 unit 0.530
1000 400 ... 1000 1250 ... 14000 3VT9410-6AC00 1 unit 0.481
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function
• Provides protection for motors and generators
• Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
315 125 ... 315 500 ... 5000 3VT9431-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
630 250 ... 630 800 ... 10000 3VT9463-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
800 315 ... 800 1000 ... 12000 3VT9480-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 1250 ... 14000 3VT9410-6AP00 1 unit 0.483
Universal protection, ETU UP, LSI function
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance
315 125 ... 315 3 ... 9 x IR 500 ... 5000 3VT9431-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
630 250 ... 630 3 ... 9 x IR 800 ... 10000 3VT9463-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
4 800
1000
315 ... 800
400 ... 1000
3 ... 9 x IR
3 ... 9 x IR
1000 ... 12000
1250 ... 14000
3VT9480-6AD00
3VT9410-6AD00
1 unit
1 unit
0.500
0.590
Switch-disconnector unit
1000 Switch-disconnec- 3VT9410-6DT00 1 unit 0.452
tor unit
Signalling unit
Signalling unit for trip units ETU DP, ETU MP, ETU UP 3VT9500-6AE00 1 unit 0.670

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary switches
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V/DC 60 ... 240 V 3VT9500-2AF10 1 unit 0.041
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9500-2AF20 1 unit 0.041
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24 V 3VT9500-1SF00 1 unit 0.199
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9500-1SG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-1SH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-1SJ00 1 unit 0.237
AC 400 V 3VT9500-1SK00 1 unit 0.220
AC 500 V 3VT9500-1SL00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 24 V 3VT9500-1UF00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9500-1UG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-1UH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-1UJ00 1 unit 0.220
AC 400 V 3VT9500-1UK00 1 unit 0.220
AC 500 V 3VT9500-1UL00 1 unit 0.220

4/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear ca-
binet door the following components are additionally needed:
The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of:
• 3VT9500-3HJ10 extension shaft
• 3VT9500-3HA10 rotary operating mechanism
• 3VT9500-3HG10/HG20 coupling driver
• 3VT9500-3HE/HF10 hand drive lever
P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
(hand drive unit)
• lockable with padlock 3VT9500-3HA10 1 unit 0.230
Hand drive lever

Coupling driver
• Degree of protection IP44 3VT9500-3HG10 1 unit 0.265
4
Extension shaft
• length 365 mm (can be shortened) 3VT9500-3HJ10 1 unit 0.352
Mechanical Interlocking
Mechanical interlocking for the rotary operating mechanism 3VT9500-8LA00 1 unit 0.120
for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mecha-
nism and a knob.
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8LC10 1 unit 0.400
• For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch 3VT9500-8LC30 1 unit 0.400
disconnector
• For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version 3VT9500-8LC40 1 unit 0.400
Motorized operating mechanism;
Rated control voltage
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-3MN00 1 unit 4.350
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-3MQ00 1 unit 4.454
Motorized operating mechanism with
operations counter;
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-3MN10 1 unit 4.400
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-3MQ10 1 unit 4.400

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/5
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Withdrawable version - 2 x 3VT9500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
3VT9500-4RD30 (rear connection)
When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on
page 5/10 as well as the deionizing space (see page 5/34) must • We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to
be observed the switchboard with:
- 3VT9500-4SA40 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x60)
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 3VT4710-3AA38-0AA0 switching unit, 3-pole version;

Version Max. permissible Type of cables DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
approx.
mm2 kg
Withdrawable version base for 3-pole circuit breaker/switch 3VT9500-4WA30 1 unit 13.888
disconnector
Connecting sets
4
Box terminals, double 2 x 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9524-4TG30 1 unit 1.475
For connecting four 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to use two
3VT9524-4TG30 connecting sets. Not for
3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Box terminals, 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9524-4TF30 1 unit 0.663

For connecting three 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to combine
the 3VT9524-4TG30 connecting set with the 3VT9524-4TF30
connecting set. Not for 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Rear connection Busbars

• Up to 1000 A 3VT9400-4RC30 1 unit 1.420
• Up to 1600 A 3VT9500-4RC30 1 unit 2.678
Front connection Busbars 3VT9500-4EF30 1 unit 2.730

Rear connection Busbars 3VT9500-4RD30 1 unit 3.420

Terminals for circular 150 ... 300 Cu/Al cables

conductors
• for 2 cables 3VT9532-4TF30 1 unit 1.040

4/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Further accessories

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Insulating barriers
In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), the insula-
ting barriers must also be installed on the bottom side.
Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixed-
mounted version.
• For switching unit, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8CE30 1 unit 0.264
• For withdrawable version 3VT9500-8CF30 1 unit 0.142
Terminal cover protection

Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20.
Intended for withdrawable version with front connection.
We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides
of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the
electrical device. 4
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8CD30 1 unit 0.287
with rear connection
• For withdrawable version with front connection 3VT9500-8CC30 1 unit 0.168
• For fixed design with block type terminals 3VT9500-8CH30 1 unit 0.700
Insulating grommets
Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdrawa-
ble version with rear connection.
The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear con-
nection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all
connecting sets with rear connection.
• For rear connection 3VT9500-8CG30 1 unit 0.100
Enables locking circuit breaker in "switched off manually" position.
For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of
6 mm may be used

• Accessory compartment cover

• For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version
(15 wire)
Position indicator 3VT9500-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable
version
Mounting bolts 3VT9500-4SA40 1 unit 0.144
• For withdrawable version
ON button cover 3VT9500-3MF20 1 unit 0.190

• For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with
sealing wire

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/7
© Siemens AG 2014

Description 3VT4 Circuit breakers Switch disconnector
Article number 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 3VT9410-6DT00
3VT4710-3AA38-0AA0
Approval marks
Number of poles 3
Rated current In A 315, 630, 800, 1000 --
Rated normal current Iu A 1000
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690,
DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B AC-23 B
Utilization category (switching mode) AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue=AC 690 V Icw/t kA/1 s 15 15
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value)1) Icu/Ue AC 85 kA/230V --
AC 55 kA/415V
AC 45 kA/500V
4
AC 20 kA/690V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue AC 45 kA/230V --
AC 36 kA/415V
AC 30 kA/500V
AC 20 kA/690V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 140 kA/AC 415 V 30 kA/AC 415 V,
30 kA/DC 440 V
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 4000
Ambient temperature range -40 ... +55
Plug-in design --
Withdrawable design ✓
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/early ✓/✓/--/--
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit ✓
Manual front operating mechanism ✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism, by Bowden wire ✓
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit ✓/--
✓ available, 1) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output
-- unavailable terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
4/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
■ Overview Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function

Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the wave-
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, form of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT4710-3AA..-0AA0 is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled
switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the cir- signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms va-
cuit breaker’s rated current can be easily changed. lue. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting circuits
Trip units for the 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit are availa- where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
ble in four current ranges In = 315, 630, 800 and 1000 A. (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
The trip units cover rated currents ranging from 125 to 1000 A. tors, pulse loading, and the like).
Tripping characteristics All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and
overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteris-
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to tics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature.
achieve the required selectivity): The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The
ETU DP trip units translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed
(with sealing wire).
L I
Ir
Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP
t trip units
The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by stan-
dard EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in two zones,
using latched switches located on the trip unit:
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
Ii
protection.
NSO0_00373
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against

ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time de-
4
I
lay can be set at 0 or 50 ms.
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristics with adjus-
table Ir and Ii. 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
• The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with one Ir
ETU MP trip units
switch. The Ir switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s rated current.
L I The characteristic moves along the current axis. The trip unit
Ir is set to one characteristic.
t
• The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two
switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts the circuit
tr
breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves along the
current axis.
Turning the other switch (tr) adjusts the time after which the cir-
Ii cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the tr
NSO0_00374
switch it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics:

I
- Four characteristics are available for motor protection.
Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20,
ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr 30. By changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristics
and Ii. according to the required motor starting (light, medium,
ETU UP trip units heavy or very heavy starting).
- Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers
ETU UP trip units have universal characteristics, with the grea- and lines.
test variability in adjustment: Ir, tr, Isd, tsd and Ii. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the time-
dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker
ETU MP and MPS
has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a
Tripping Adjust - Release Class thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the
"restart" switch from the normal "Tt" position to the "T0" position.
M3 10 A
The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its ther-
M8 10 mal memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should be
M15 20 switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge
M25 30
that the temperature could rise in the protected device, caus-
ing repeated tripping.
2. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
unit) I
The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip
units are adjusted with one switch, Ii. The Ii switch sets the short-
circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instan-
taneous tripping of the circuit breaker.
Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the
characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The
wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched
switches located on the trip unit’s front panel according to the
needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting
the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design
software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/9

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the T - When tripping from the trip unit’s "warm" state, the tripping
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the by coefficient k.
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm
state, indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is For all kinds of characteristics tr, the thermal standstill time for
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic ETU DP and MP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min.
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tsd is cut short
tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
steady state, as shown in the following graph. The steady state The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd
is a period during which the characteristics do not change. If the
circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least 30 mi- Example
nutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With
than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter. steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
NSO0_00375 to:
ts = 0.74 . tsd
1.0
k [-] k [–] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit
0.8
0.6 Trip units are set by the manufacturer
T Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
4
0.4
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, min
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100
I r [%]
4/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Adjustment of tripping characteristics, trip unit ETU UP 2. Delayed time-independent trip units S
L S I It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is
set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Ir
t Isdis an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n × Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker
with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching off the trip
tr unit.
The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit brea-
ker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-mul-
I 2 t ON tiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The trip unit can
Isd
tsd be disabled by setting the parameter n (Isd = n × Ir) into the po-
sition. Parameter tsd can be set to values with respect to the
Ii energy that passed through l2t (switch position l2t on). The pre-
I 2 t OFF set time values are then applicable for currents higher than 10x
NSO0_00456
current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of Ir for k < 10 are defined

as follows:
I
10 2
The tripping characteristics of trip units are defined by standard t = t sd  
 k
EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in three zones
using latched switches located on the trip unit: 3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal It is set up with parameter Ii. Ii is a short-circuit current that, when
protection. reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch off in-
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance stantaneously. It is set up directly in kA on the trip unit. The wave
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched swit-
ches located on the trip unit’s front panel to match the needs of
4
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selecti-
vity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the trip-
self-contained trip units (full version). ping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software
(Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuiting without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in the ON position represents a cons-
tant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protec-
tive elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust
the selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape
of the fuse characteristics.
1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two swit-
ches, Ir and tr. The first switch, Ir, adjusts the circuit breaker’s ra-
ted current. The characteristics move along the current axis.
Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which the cir-
cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 characte-
ristics can be set with the tr switch. Breaking times correspond
to tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the time-
dependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit
must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The me-
mory can be disabled by turning the "restart" switch from the nor-
mal "Tt" position to the "T0" position. The time-dependent trip unit
remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated. The
thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases,
and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in
the protected device, causing repeated tripping.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/11

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics for ETU UP trip units with load Example
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the trip- The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment steady current 85% of Ir, the real tripping time will be shortened
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the to:
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm
state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, ts = 0.74 . tsd
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is k [–] time shortening coefficient
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic Ir [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are tsd [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteris-
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a tics
tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
state is a period during which the characteristics do not change.
Trip units are set by the manufacturer
If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least Ir = min
30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by half. If the load is Restart = T(t)
less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter. Ii = min
NSO0_00375 tr = min
tsd = min, I2t - ON
1.0 Isd = min
k [-]
0.8 Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
0.6 Ii = min, 0 ms
T tr = TV, t(t), min
4 0.4 Isd
I=
= 0 ms, min
0.5 Ir
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100
I r [%]
T - When tripping from the "warm" state, the tripping time of the
characteristics are cut short during the standstill time tu by coef-
ficient k.
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tsd is cut short from the cold-state characteristics
by the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k .tsd
4/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Specifications for adjustable trip units
The 3VT94..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for the Article No. Rated cur- Overload Restart Instantaneous short
3VT4710-3AA..-0AA0 switching units. Operation of the trip unit is rent In protection Ir circuit protection Ii
controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a ther-
mal memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the A A kA
front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having disab- 125, 137 0.5
led the thermal memory, the thermal tripping function remains
144, 160 1
active.
172, 180 1.5
A practical advantage of the trip unit is special tripping charac-
teristics that provide for optimized use of transformers up to 1.5 200, 220 T(0) 2
I n. 3VT9431-6AC00 315 231, 243 T(t) 2.5
Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the 250, 260 3
tripping characteristics. Set-up includes only the rated current in
275, 290 4
a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-circuit tripping level. Re-
aching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the 305, 315 5
front panel denoted as I > 80% and I > 110% of Ir. 250, 260 0.8
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are four photo-
cells for communicating with the 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit. 275, 290 1.5
305, 315 2
345, 360 T(0) 3
NSO0_00377
10000
Ir 3VT9463-6AC00 630 400, 435 T(t) 4
5000 min. max.
t [s] Ir Ii 455, 480 6
2000
500, 550 8
1000
500
200
575, 630
315, 345
10
1 4
100 360, 400 1.5
L
50 435, 455 2
20 480, 500 T(0) 3
10 3VT9480-6AC00 800 550, 575 T(0) 4
In = 315 A
In=630A
5 In=1000A
In = 630 A 3 3 610, 630 6
2 In = 800 A
In=1250A
In = 1000 A
In=1600A 685, 720 9
1
0.5 760, 800 12
I 400, 435 1.25
0.2
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
2.5
3.0 4.0 5.0
455, 480 2
0.05 500, 550 3
In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.02 575, 610 T(0) 5
0.01 3VT9410-6AC00 1000 630, 685 T(0) 7
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 720, 760 9
In = 630 A Ii [kA] 800, 866 12
0.02
0.01 909, 1000 14
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05
In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05
In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
NSO0_00574
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/13

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection
Article No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
• Direct protection of motors and generators current protection Ir short circuit
In protection Ii
• Can protect lines and transformers
A A S kA ms
The 3VT94..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for the
3VT4710-3AA..-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip 0.8
unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped 250, 260 1 (TV 1) 1.5
with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch
on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having 2
disabled the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains ac- 275, 290 3 (TV 3) T(0) 3
tive.
4 0
A practical advantage of the trip unit are specially designed trip- 305, 315 10 (TV 10) 6
ping characteristics that provide for optimal exploitation of trans-
formers up to 1.5 In. 8
It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit. 3VT9463-6AP00 630 345, 360 30 (TV 30) 10
From these, in mode "M", there are 4 characteristics for motor 10
protection and another 4 characteristics in mode "TV" for protec- 400, 435 3 (M 3) 8
ting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic
can be changed using a selector switch. 6
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the 455, 480 8 (M 8) T(t) 4
switch will open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent trip- 3 50
ping).
500, 550 15 (M 15) 2
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current, 1.5
which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-cir-
cuit tripping level, for which it is possible to set the delay at 0 or 375, 630 25 (M 25) 0.8
50 ms. The reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED 1
4 diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110%
of Ir. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two pho- 315, 345 1 (TV 1) 1.5
tocells for communicating with the 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling 2
unit.
455, 480 3 (TV 3) T(0) 3 0
4
500, 550 10 (TV 10) 6
9
3VT9480-6AP00 800 575, 610 30 (TV 30) 12
NSO0_00575
12
Specifications for adjustable trip units
630, 685 3 (M 3) 9
Article No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
current protection Ir short circuit 6
In protection Ii 722, 760 8 (M 8) T(t) 4
A A S kA ms 3 50
0.5 800, 866 15 (M 15) 2
125, 137 1 (TV 1) 1 1.5
1.5 909, 1000 25 (M 25) 1
144, 160 3 (TV 3) T(0) 2 0 1.25
2.5 400, 435 1 (TV 1) 2
172, 180 10 (TV 10) 3 3
4 455, 480 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
3VT9431-6AP00 315 200, 220 30 (TV 30) 5 7
5 500, 550 10 (TV 10) 9
231, 243 3 (M 3) 4 12
3 3VT9410-6AP00 1000 575, 610 30 (TV 30) 14
250, 260 8 (M 8) T(t) 2.5 50 14
2 630, 685 3 (M 3) 12
275, 290 15 (M 15) 1.5 9
1 722, 760 8 (M 8) 7
305, 315 25 (M 25) 0.5 T(t) 5 50
800, 866 15 (M 15) 3
2
909, 1000 25 (M 25) 1.25
4/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00378 NSO0_00379
10000 10000 Ir
Ir TV min. max.
M
min. max. 5000
5000
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500 25
200 200
L tr L
100 100
50 30 50 tr
30 25
20 20
15 15
10 10 10 10
IIn=630A
n = 315 A IIn=630A
n = 315 A
8 8
5 5 IIn=1000A
IIn=1000A
n = 630 A 3 3
n = 630 A
3 3
IIn=1250A
n = 800 A 2 IIn=1250A
n = 800 A
2
IIn=1600A
n = 1000 A IIn=1600A
n = 1000 A
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05 In = 315 A Ii [kA]
In = 315 A 2.5 Ii [kA] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
2.5
3.0 4.0 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 630 A Ii [kA] In = 630 A Ii [kA]
4
0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05 Ii [kA]
In = 800 A Ii [kA] In = 800 A
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 In = 1000 A 14 Ii [kA] 0.05 In = 1000 A 14 Ii [kA]
1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/15

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator
advance that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the
blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load
The 3VT94..-6AD00 trip unit is intended for the larger than 110% of Ir this LED will turn red and just before
3VT4710-3AA..-0AA0 switching unit only. The UP trip unit is tripping will begin to blink red. Located on the lower part of the
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by tur- trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the
ning the "restart" switch on the front panel from the position T(t) to 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit.
the position T(0). After the thermal memory has been disabled,
the thermal trip unit remains active.
A practical advantage of the UP trip unit is its maximum flexibility
for adjusting the tripping characteristics. With its possibility for
setting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.

Article No. Rated current Overload pro- tr (7.2 x Ir) Short delayed short tsd I2t Restart Instantaneous short
In tection Ir circuit protection circuit protection Ii
Isd=(n x Ir)
A A S n ms kA
125, 137 0.5 2 50, 100 0.5
144, 160 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1
172, 180 5 5 400, 600 1.5
3VT9431-6AD00 315 200, 220 7 6 800, 1000 2
4 231, 243
250, 260
10
15
8
9
50, 100
200, 300 off T(t)
2.5
3
275, 290 20 10 400, 600 4
305, 315 25 ∞ 800, 1000 5
250, 260 0.5 2 50, 100 0.8
275, 290 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
305, 315 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9463-6AD00 630 345, 360 7 6 800, 1000 3
400, 435 10 8 50, 100 4
455, 480 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
500, 550 20 10 400, 600 8
575, 630 25 ∞ 800, 1000 10
315, 345 0.5 2 50, 100 1
360, 400 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
435, 455 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9480-6AD00 800 480, 500 7 6 800, 1000 3
550, 575 10 8 50, 100 4
610, 630 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
685, 720 20 10 400, 600 9
760, 800 25 ∞ 800, 1000 12
400, 435 0.5 2 50, 100 1.25
455, 480 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 2
500, 550 5 5 400, 600 3
3VT9410-6AD00 1000 575, 610 7 6 800, 1000 5
630, 685 10 8 50, 100 7
720, 760 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 9
800, 866 20 10 400, 600 12
909, 1000 25 ∞ 800, 1000 14
NSO0_00576
4/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics ETU UP
NSO0_00380a NSO0_00381a
10000 10000 min max.
min max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
t [s] Ir tr Isd tsd Ii t [s] Ir tr Isd tsd Ii
2000 2000
1000 Ii = (2 … 10) x Ir min Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
200 Ii = (2 … 10) x Ir max 200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max

L L
100 100
50 50
20 In = 315 A 20 In = 315 A
In = 630 A In = 630 A
10 In = 800 A 10 In = 800 A
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
2 2 S
S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5 0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5

tsd [ms] tsd [ms]
I (I 2 t = ON) I
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) 0.2
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
4
In = 630 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 630 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12
14 0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 4/17

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics ETU UP
NSO0_00382a NSO0_00383a
10000 min max. 10000 min max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 In = 315 A 25 25
In = 315 A 25 25
20
In = 630 A In = 630 A
10 In = tr [s] 10 tr [s]
800 A In = 800 A
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
3 3 3 3
2 S 2
1 S
1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5
tsd [ms]
I tsda [ms]
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) I
0.2 (I 2 t = ON)
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 315 A Ii [kA] 0.02 In = 315 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10 0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
4 0.02
0.01
In = 630 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
In = 630 A I i [kA]
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12 0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 800 A Ii [kA] In = 800 A I i [kA]

0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214 0.1
1.25 2.0 3.0 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05 50
0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A Ii [kA] In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
4/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

5
© Siemens AG 2014

up to 1600 A

up to 1600 A
5/2 General data
5/5 Manual/motorized operating
mechanisms

Technical Information up to 1600 A
5/12 Withdrawable version
5/14 Trip units
5/24 Signalling units
5/26 Shunt trip units
5/27 Undervoltage trip units
5/28 Rotary operating mechanism
5/29 Mechanical interlocking and parallel
switching
5/34 Insulating barriers
© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switching unit 9
10
11
1
12
5 16
14 15
13
Accessories
NSO0_00229a
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Molded case circuit breaker 10 Rotary operating mechanism 19 Extension cable

2 Multiple box terminals 11 Mechanical interlocking 20 Terminal cover
3 Box terminals 12 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 21 Terminal cover
4 Circular conductor terminal 13 Motor operating mechanism 22 Insulating barriers
5 Multiple feed-in terminal 14 Shunt trip unit 23 Insulating barriers
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 15 Undervoltage trip unit 24 Insulating grommets
7 Rear connection 16 Switch 25 Mounting bolts
8 Front connection 17 Lockingtype lever
9 Rear connection 18 Sealing inset
5/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Catalog
■ Overview
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3-pole switching unit (fixed-
• 3VT9500-8CE30 insulating barriers mounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is availa-
ble with a choice of different characteristics.
• Set of installation bolts (4x M8 x 80)
• Connecting sets for front connection - busbar connection Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be outfitted with: The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixed-
mounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector
• Trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or unit.
• 3VT9516-6DT00 switch disconnector unit
(switch disconnector)
For the withdrawable version, the 3VT5716-3AA38-0AA0
switching unit additionally requires
• 3VT9500-4WA40 withdrawable version base

Rated Current Short-circuit breaking DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
In capacity Icu at AC 400 V P. unit per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
Fixed-mounted version, 3-pole
1600 55 3VT5716-3AA30-0AA0 1 unit 23.000
Withdrawable version, 3-pole

1600 55 3VT5716-3AA38-0AA0 1 unit 23.000
5
For different versions of connection, it is necessary to use con-
necting sets (see page 5/6).

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/3
© Siemens AG 2014


Rated current Set current of the S function short- Operating cur- DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
In inverse-time circuit protection rent of the instan- P. unit per PU
delayed overload (short-time taneous short- approx.
trip units "L" Ir delayed) "S" Isd circuit releases "I"
Ii
A A A kg
Electronic trip units (ETU)
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function
• For protecting lines and trans-
formers
630 250 ... 630 800 ... 10000 3VT9563-6AC00 1 unit 0.670
1000 400 ... 1000 1250 ... 15000 3VT9510-6AC00 1 unit 0.590
1250 500 ... 1250 1500 ... 18000 3VT9512-6AC00 1 unit 0.529
1600 630 ... 1600 2000 ... 20000 3VT9516-6AC00 1 unit 0.533
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function
• Provides protection for motors and generators
• Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
630 250 ... 630 800 ... 10000 3VT9563-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 1250 ... 15000 3VT9510-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1250 500 ... 1250 1500 ... 18000 3VT9512-6AP00 1 unit 0.530
1600 630 ... 1600 2000 ... 20000 3VT9516-6AP00 1 unit 0.590
Universal protection, ETU UP LSI function
• Provides protection for complicated loads or loads
not specified in advance
630 250 ... 630 2 ... 10 x IR 800 ... 10000 3VT9563-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 2 ... 10 x IR 1250 ... 15000 3VT9510-6AD00 1 unit 0.593
1250 500 ... 1250 2 ... 10 x IR 1500 ... 18000 3VT9512-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
1600 630 ... 1600 2 ... 10 x IR 2000 ... 20000 3VT9516-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
1600 Switch discon- 3VT9516-6DT00 1 unit 0.400
nector unit
5 Signalling unit
Signalling unit for 3VT9500-6AE00 1 unit 0.670
trip units ETU DP,
MP and UP

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary switches
AC 60 ... 500 V/DC60 ... 240 V 3VT9500-2AF10 1 unit 0.041
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V 3VT9500-2AF20 1 unit 0.041
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24 V 3VT9500-1SF00 1 unit 0.199
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9500-1SG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-1SH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-1SJ00 1 unit 0.237
AC 400 V 3VT9500-1SK00 1 unit 0.220
AC 500 V 3VT9500-1SL00 1 unit 0.220

AC/DC 24 V 3VT9500-1UF00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 48 V 3VT9500-1UG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-1UH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-1UJ00 1 unit 0.220
AC 400 V 3VT9500-1UK00 1 unit 0.220
AC 500 V 3VT9500-1UL00 1 unit 0.220

5/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear ca-
binet door the following components are additionally needed:
The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of:
• 3VT9500-3HJ10 extension shaft
• 3VT9500-3HA10 rotary operating mechanism
• 3VT9500-3HG10/HG20 coupling driver
• 3VT9500-3HE/HF10 hand drive lever

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
(hand drive unit)
• lockable with padlock 3VT9500-3HA10 1 unit 0.230
Hand drive lever

Coupling driver
Extension shaft 3VT9500-3HJ10 1 unit 0.352

length 365 mm
Mechanical interlocking for the rotary operating mechanism 3VT9500-8LA00 1 unit 0.120
for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mecha-
5
nism and a knob.
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8LC10 1 unit 0.400
• For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch 3VT9500-8LC30 1 unit 0.400
disconnector
• For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version 3VT9500-8LC40 1 unit 0.400
Motorized operating mechanism;
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-3MN00 1 unit 4.350
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-3MQ00 1 unit 4.454
Motorized operating mechanism with
operations counter;
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9500-3MN10 1 unit 4.400
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 3VT9500-3MQ10 1 unit 4.400

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/5
© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
Withdrawable version - 2 x 3VT9500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
3VT9500-4RD30 (rear connection)
When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on
page 5/10 as well as the deionizing space (see page 5/34) must • We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to
be observed the switchboard with:
- 3VT9500-4SA40 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x 60)
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 3VT5716-3AA38-0AA0 switching unit, 3-pole version;

Version Max. permissible Type of cables DT Article No. PS*/ Weight
approx.
mm2 kg
Withdrawable version base for 3-pole circuit breaker/switch 3VT9500-4WA30 1 unit 13.888
disconnector
Connecting sets
Box terminals, double 2 x 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9524-4TG30 1 unit 1.475
For connecting four 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to use two
3VT9524-4TG30 connecting sets (see page 5/11). Not for
3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Box terminals, 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables 3VT9524-4TF30 1 unit 0.663

For connecting three 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to combine
the 3VT9524-4TG30 connecting set with the 3VT9524-4TF30
connecting set (see page 5/11). Not for 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0
switching unit.
5
Rear connection Busbars
• Up to 1000 A 3VT9400-4RC30 1 unit 1.420
• Up to 1600 A 3VT9500-4RC30 1 unit 2.678
Front connection Busbars 3VT9500-4EF30 1 unit 2.730

Rear connection Busbars 3VT9500-4RD30 1 unit 3.420

Terminals for circular 150 ... 300 Cu/Al cables

conductors

5/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Further accessories

P. unit per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Insulating barriers
In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), the insula-
ting barriers must also be installed on the bottom side.
Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixed-
mounted version.
• For switching unit, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8CE30 1 unit 0.264
• For withdrawable version 3VT9500-8CF30 1 unit 0.142
Terminal cover protection

Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20.
Intended for withdrawable version with front connection.
We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides
of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the
electrical device.
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version 3VT9500-8CD30 1 unit 0.287
with rear connection
• For withdrawable version with front connection 3VT9500-8CC30 1 unit 0.168
• For fixed design with block type terminals 3VT9500-8CH30 1 unit 0.700
Insulating grommets
5
Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdrawa-
ble version with rear connection.
The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear con-
nection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all
connecting sets with rear connection.
• For rear connection 3VT9500-8CG30 1 unit 0.100
Enables locking circuit breaker in "switched off manually" position.
For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of
6 mm may be used

• Accessory compartment cover

• For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version
(15 wire)
Position indicator 3VT9500-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable
version
Mounting bolts 3VT9500-4SA40 1 unit 0.144
• For withdrawable version
ON button cover 3VT9500-3MF20 1 unit 0.190

• For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with
sealing wire

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/7
© Siemens AG 2014

Type 3VT5 circuit breakers Switch disconnector
Article number 3VT5716-3AA30-0AA0 3VT9516-6DT00
3VT5716-3AA38-0AA0
Approval marks
Number of poles 3
Rated current In A 630, 1000, 1250, 1600 --
Rated normal current Iu A 1600
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B --
Utilization category (switching mode) AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t kA/1 s 20
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity 85 kA/AC 230 V --
(rms value)1) Icu 55 kA/AC 415 V
45 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 45 kA/AC 230 V --
36 kA/AC 415 V
30 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity 140 kA/AC 415 V 40 kA/AC 415 V
(peak value) Icm/Ue 40 kA/AC 440 V
5
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) 4000
Ambient temperature range -40 ... +55
Plug-in version --
Withdrawable version ✓
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/✓/--/--
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit ✓
Front rotary operating mechanism ✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism by ✓
Bowden wire
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit ✓/--
✓ available, 0) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6,

-- unavailable output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
5/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Schematics
Circuit breaker with accessories
Recommended wiring of the Withdrawable device Connecting cable
control circuits 2 4 1 1 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Q3 (7)
L+ SO 1
X2
(8)
ON
B OFF
Motor drive Auxiliary trips Main circuit Switches

auxiliary auxiliary relative relative
1.13
1.21
1.31
3VT9500-2AF00 1.43
2.13
2.21
2.31
3VT9500-2AF00 2.43
3.13
3.21
3.31
3VT9500-2AF00 3.43
4.13
4.21
4.31
3VT9500-2AF00 4.43
1 3 5
B1
A1
3VT9500-6AE00
3VT9500-1U.00
3VT9500-1S.00
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
I>
I>
NC NO
or
S5 V Q
M P U< U
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP 6 2 1
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
A2
B2
6 2 9
X3 J 2 4 6
acc.c. no. 5 aks.b. no. 1 aks.b. no. 2 aks.b. no. 3 aks.b. no. 4
N-
3VT9
SO 2
500-
NSO0_00384a
4WA40 X1
1 4 2 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Withdrawable device Connecting cable

M Motor
SSI Switch signalling MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C) modes
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits
ON Pushbutton
OFF Pushbutton
J 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0, 3VT5716-3AA30-0AA0 switching
unit
Q Main contacts
T1, T2, T3, Current transformers
ETU Trip unit, ETU DP, MP and UP
TEST Pushbutton to test tripping
ZV-BL 3VT9500-4WA40 withdrawable version
X1, X2 3VT9500-4PL00 connecting cable for withdrawable
version
SO1, SO2 Contacts indicating positions of 3VT9500-4WL00 (see
page 5/7) withdrawable versions, see page 5/24.
3VT9500-1U..0 Undervoltage trip units
3VT9500-1S..0 Shunt trip units
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/9

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Functions
Switching states in the circuit breaker cavities
Accessory compartment 1, 2 3, 4
3VT9500-2AF10
3VT9500-2AF10
Circuit breaker position

of circuit breaker
Lever position
NSO0_00093
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off manually or 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

mechanism
Switched off by the trip unit, 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
auxiliary trip unit or by TEST
pushbutton
0 = contact open 1 = contact closed
■ Design
Main circuit Mechanical reinforcement of conductors for 3VT4/5
• Connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables Ik ≤ 25 kA Ik ≤ 65 kA
with cable lugs.
• Connecting sets are available for greater connecting options,
(see page 5/6).
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected
5
70
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to

terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). But it is possible to exchange this con-
nection (switching of input and output terminals) without limit-
20
ing rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu.

• In case of reversed connection, the circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector must be provided with 3VT9500-8CE30 insulating
barriers also between terminals 2, 4, 6 (for detailed informa-
20
tion, see page 5/34).

• We recommend painting the connecting busbars.
• Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
70
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the

circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting.
I201_18831
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the

not obstructed (see page 5/34). Recommended cross-sections for cables, busbars and flexibars
Auxiliary circuits for fixed-mounted and withdrawable versions
• Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are con- Rated current Permissible cross- Busbars W x H
nected using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors to the In section S
terminals on these devices. Cu AI Cu Al
• Auxiliary circuits of the withdrawable version are connected
using a connector. A mm2 mm2 mm mm
250 120 150
400 185 240
500 2 x 150 2 x 185
630 2 x 185 2 x 240
800 2 x 240 3 x 240 50 x 10 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 8
1000 2 x 240 3 x 240 2 x 50 x 6
1300 3 x 240 4 x 240 2 x 50 x 10
1500 (1450)1) 4 x 240 2 x 50 x 10
1600 (1450)1) 2 x 50 x 101)
1)
The withdrawable version connected by 2 x 50 x 12 mm Cu busbars can
be loaded with max. 1420 A. For 1600 A loading, the withdrawable version
must be connected by 2 x 50 x 12 mm busbars.
5/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in

accordance with ambient temperature
3VT4 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of
Cu busbars 2 x 50 x 6 mm to pole
50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
1000 A 1000 A 940 A 870 A 800 A
3VT5 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of

Cu busbars 2 x 50 x 10 mm to pole
50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
1400 A 1300 A 1200 A 1100 A 1000 A
Specifications of cable shapes
Article No. of Max. rated Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S

connecting set current I
Cable type
Sector-shaped Sector-shaped Round Round conductor, Busbars and Technical
conductor, conductor, solid conductor, stranded solid cable lugs information
stranded
WxH
A mm2 mm
3VT9524-4TG30 800 2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al 2 x (95 ... 300) Cu/Al 2 x (50 ... 185) Cu/Al 2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al 5/36, 5/36
3VT9524-4TF30 500 70 ... 240 Cu/Al 95 ... 300 Cu/Al 50 ... 185 Cu/Al 70 ... 240 Cu/Al 5/36, 5/36
5
3VT9400-4RC30 1000 50 x .... 5/35
3VT9500-4RC30 1600 50 x .... 5/35, 5/35
3VT9500-4EF30 1600 50 x .... 5/41
3VT9500-4RD30 1600 50 x .... --
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/11

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Overview
3VT9500-4WC00 specifications
Article number 3VT9500-4WL00
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 230 V
Rated operating current 6 A/AC 230 V
Ie/Ue
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch discon- Connector cross-section S 0.5 ... 1 mm2
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where Terminal protection IP20
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of (connected switch)
the circuit are needed.
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with the follow- For the wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable de-
ing connecting sets: vice with accessories, see page 5/9.
2 x 3VT9500-4EF30, for front connection or 3VT9500-4WL00 position signalling
2 x 3VT9500-4RD30, for rear connection
The withdrawable device can be provided with up to four swit-
• For mounting withdrawable device to switchgear, use ches for signalling the circuit breaker’s switched-on position (see
3VT9500-4SA40 installation bolts, see page 5/7. table).
Circuit breaker position Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has three posi- • Remote signalling of circuit breaker‘s switched-on position
tions: (position of locking is not signalled)
1. inserted (connected position) • Checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
2. withdrawn (disconnected position) checking position
3. removed • Locking of withdrawable device against inserting circuit
breaker, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
Main circuit position - locking by means of padlocks.
• Visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
• To connect busbars and cable lugs, use 3VT9500-4EF30 con- • Easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
nection set (front connection) or 3VT9500-4RD30 (rear con-
nection).
• For connection using cables, it is necessary to additionally
use 3VT9500-4EF30 or 3VT9500-4RD30 connection sets.
5 • The way of connecting the main circuit must observe recom-

mendations (see page 5/10) as well as deionizing space (see
page 5/34).
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 3VT9500-4PL00 15-wire cables.
Circuit breaker accessories for withdrawable version
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has the same
accessories as the fixed-mounted version.
States of switches 3VT9500-4WL00 in withdrawable device

according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
Circuit breaker position State of switch
1 1
2 4 2 4
Switched on (locked or not locked) 0 1

Other positions 1 0
0 = contact open
1 = contact closed
5/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Recommended wiring of circuit breaker, withdrawable version
with motorized operating mechanism Symbol Description
Control circuit M Motor
Q3 P Energy storage device
L+
ON X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter

SSI Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
B OFF
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control cir-
cuits not included in motor driver delivery)
Motor drive Switches
ON Make pushbutton
relative
3VT9500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10 AC 110 V 5SX4104-7
AC 230 V 5SX4102-7
5 7 3 4 1 3 DC 110 V 5SX5104-7
DC 220 V 5SX5102-7
NC NO
Inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker with motorized
SSI operating mechanism
C M P
• Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
we recommend first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the
NSO0_00452a
motor drive to the MANUAL position

• More information is available in the operating instructions
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
MP 6 2 1 • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-

acc.c. 4 mended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully turn on at the first attempt
6 2 9
X3
N-
Changes in states of switches in compartments of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawal State after insertion/withdrawal
Circuit breaker state before insertion State of switches before insertion→ State of switches after insertion
-withdrawn position inserted position
Circuit breaker state before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal→ State of switches after withdrawal
inserted position withdrawn position
accessory compartment accessory compartment
1,2 3,4 1,2 3,4
3VT9500-2AF10
3VT9500-2AF10
3VT9500-2AF10
3VT9500-2AF10
Lever position of
circuit breaker
main contacts
State of the
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Switched off manually or by motor drive 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Switched off from the switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

by the trip unit or TEST button
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/13

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function
which has to be ordered separately and in addition to the
3VT5716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit. By exchanging the trip Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the wave-
unit, the range of the circuit breaker’s rated current can be easily form of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit
changed. is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms va-
Trip units for the 3VT5716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit are availa- lue. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting circuits
ble in four current values In = 630, 1000, 1250 and 1600 A. The where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
trip units cover rated currents ranging from 250 to 1600 A. (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
tors, pulse loading, and the like).
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteris-
achieve the required selectivity): tics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature.
ETU DP trip units The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The
translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed
L I (with sealing wire).
Ir
Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP
t trip units
The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by stan-
dard EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in two zones
using latched switches located on the trip unit:
L -is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
protection.
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
Ii ultimate short-circuit currents.

NSO0_00506
The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two swit-

ches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s ra-
I
ted current. The characteristic moves along the current axis.
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable Turning the other switch (tr) adjusts the time after which the cir-
5
Ir and Ii. cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the tr switch
ETU MP trip units it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics:
L I • Four characteristics are available for motor protection. Break-
ing times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30. By
Ir changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristics
t according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy
or very heavy starting).
tr • Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers
and lines.
dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker
has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a
Ii
thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the
"restart" switch from the normal "Tt" position to the "T0" position.
The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal
NSO0_00454
memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should be swit-

ched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that the
temperature could rise in the protected device, causing repea-
I
ted tripping.
ETU MP trip units have more kinds of characteristics with adjus- 2. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
table Ir, tr and Ii. unit) I
ETU UP trip units The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip
They have universal characteristics, with the greatest variability units are adjusted with one switch, Ii. The Ii switch sets the short-
in adjustment: Ir, tr, Isdv, tsd and Ii. circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instan-
taneous tripping of the circuit breaker.
Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the
characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The
wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched
switches located on the trip unit’s front panel according to the
needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting
the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design
software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
5/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the T - When tripping from the trip unit‘s "warm" state, the tripping
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the by coefficient k.
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill time for
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic ETU DP and MP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min.
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of trip- During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tsd is cut short
ping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a from the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd
state is a period during which the characteristic does not
change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for Example:
at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
shorter. to:
ts = 0.74 . tsd
NSO0_00455
1.0 k [–] time shortening coefficient
k [-] Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit
0.8
0.6
Ir = min
T Restart = T(t)
Ii = min
0.4
tr = TV, min
ETU MP and MPS
0.2
Tripping Adjust - Release Class
M3 10 A
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100 M8 10
I r [%] M15 20
5
^
M25 30
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/15

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic adjustment, trip unit ETU UP 2. Delayed time-independent trip units S
L S I It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is
set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Ir
t Isd is an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n × Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Irm, will trip the circuit brea-
ker with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching off the
tr trip unit.
The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit brea-
ker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-mul-
I 2 t ON tiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The trip unit can
Isd
tsd be disabled by setting the parameter n (Isd = n × Ir) into the po-
sition. Parameter tsd can be set to values with respect to the
Ii energy that passed through l2t (switch position l2t on). The pre-
I 2 t OFF set time values are then applicable for currents higher than 10x
NSO0_00456
current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of Ir for k < 10 are defined

as follows:
I
10 2
The tripping characteristic of trip unit is defined by standard t = t sd  
 k
EN 60 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in three zones using
latched switches located on the trip unit: 3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal It is set up with parameter Ii. Ii is a short-circuit current that, when
protection. reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch off in-
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance stantaneously. It is set up directly in kA on the trip unit. The wave
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched swit-
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selecti- ches located on the trip unit’s front panel to match the needs of
vity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the trip-
self-contained trip units (full version). ping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design software
(Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit currents without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in ON position represents a constant
value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protective
elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust the
selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape of the
5 fuse characteristics.
The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two swit-
ches, Ir and tr. The first switch, Ir, adjusts the circuit breaker’s ra-
ted current. The characteristics move along the current axis.
Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which the cir-
cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 characte-
ristics can be set with the tr switch. Breaking times correspond
to tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
dependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit
must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The me-
mory can be disabled by turning the "restart" switch from the nor-
mal "Tt" position to the "T0" position. The time-dependent trip unit
remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated. The
thermal memory should be switched off only in justified cases,
and with the knowledge that there could be rising temperature in
the protected device, causing repeated tripping..
5/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU UP trip units with load Example
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the trip- The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the to:
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, ts = 0.74 . tsd
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is k [-] time shortening coefficient
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic Ir [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are tsd [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
trip unit in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady
state is a period during which the characteristic does not Trip units are set by the manufacturer
change. Ir = min
If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least Restart = T(t)
30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is Ii = min
less than 70% of Ir, the tripping time does not become shorter. tr = min
tsd = min, I2t - ON
Tripping time shortening with load Isd = min
NSO0_00455
1.0
k [-]
0.8
0.6
T
0.4
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90
I r [%]
100
5
T - When tripping from the "warm" state, the tripping time of the
characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu by coeffici-
ent k.
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tsd is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by
the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/17

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Article No. Rated current Overload Restart Instantaneous
The 3VT95..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for In protection Ir short circuit
protection Ii
3VT5716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching units. Operation of the trip unit
is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a A A kA
thermal memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on 250, 260 0.8
the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having di-
sabled the thermal memory, the thermal tripping function re- 275, 290 1.5
mains active. 305, 315 2
A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed 3VT9563-6AC00 630 345, 360 T(0) 2.5
tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of
400, 435 T(t) 4.5
transformers up to 1.5 In.
455, 480 6
Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the
tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only rated current and 500, 550 7.5
the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit. Reaching 80% and 575, 630 10
110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted
400, 435 1.25
as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir. Located on the lower part of
the trip unit cover are four photocells for communicating with the 455, 480 2
3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit. 500, 550 3
Tripping characteristics 3VT9510-6AC00 1000 575, 630 T(0) 5
NSO0_00458
10000 630, 685 T(t) 7
Ir
5000 min. max.
720, 760 9
t [s] Ir Ii
2000 800, 870 12
1000 910, 1000 15
500
500, 550 1.5
200
577, 610 3
100
L 630, 685 5
50
3VT9512-6AC00 1250 722, 760 T(0) 7
20
800, 866 T(t) 9
10
In = 630 A
In=630A
5 909, 1000 12
In=1000A
In = 1000 A 3 3
In = 1250 A
In=1250A
5
2 1100, 1155, 15
In = 1600 A
In=1600A
1 1200, 1250 18
0.5 630, 685 2
I
0.2 720, 800 4
0.1
870, 910 6
0.05 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
3VT9516-6AC00 1600 1000, 1100 T(0) 8
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA]
1155, 1200 T(t) 11
0.01
0.1 1250, 1300 14
0.05 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
1375, 1445 17
0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA] 1500, 1600 20
0.01
0.1
0.05 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.01
0.1
0.05 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 17
20
0.02 In = 1600 A I i [kA]
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
NSO0_00577

5/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014
© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection
• Provides protection of motors and generators Adjustable specifications
• Can protect lines and transformers Article No. Rated Overload tt (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantane-
The 3VT95..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for current protection Ir ous short
In circuit pro-
3VT5716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip tection Ii
unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped
with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch A A S kA
on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having 250, 260 1 (TV 1) 0.8
disabled the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains ac-
tive. 275, 290 3 (TV 3) 1.5
305, 315 10 (TV 10) 2
A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed
tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of 3VT9563-6AP00 630 345, 360 30 (TV 30) T(0) 2.5
transformers up to 1.5 In. 400, 435 3 (M 3) T(t) 4.5
It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit. 455, 480 8 (M 8) 6
From these, in mode "M", there are 4 characteristics for motor
500, 550 15 (M 15) 7.5
protection and another 4 characteristics in mode "TV" for protec-
ting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic 575, 630 25 (M 25) 10
can be changed using a selector switch. 400, 435 1 (TV 1) 1.25
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the 455, 480 3 (TV 3) 2
switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip-
ping). 500, 550 10 (TV 10) 3
3VT9510-6AP00 1000 575, 630 30 (TV 30) T(0) 5
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current,
which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-cir- 630, 685 3 (M 3) T(t) 7
cuit tripping level. Reaching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by 720, 760 8 (M 8) 9
LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I >
110% of Ir. Located on the lower of the trip unit cover are four 800, 870 15 (M 15) 12
photocells for communicating with the 3VT9500-6AE00 910, 1000 25 (M 25) 15
signalling unit.
500, 550 1 (TV 1) 1.5
577, 610 3 (TV 3) 3
630, 685 10 (TV 10) 5
3VT9512-6AP00 1250 722, 760 30 (TV 30) T(0) 7
800, 866 3 (M 3) T(t) 9
909, 1000 8 (M 8)
1100, 1155, 15 (M 15)
12
15
5
1200, 1250 25 (M 25) 18
630, 685 1 (TV 1) 2
720, 800 3 (TV 3) 4
870, 910 10 (TV 10) 6
3VT9516-6AP00 1600 1000, 1100 30 (TV 30) T(0) 8
1155, 1200 3 (M 3) T(t) 11
1250, 1300 8 (M 8) 14
1375, 1445 15 (M 15) 17
1500, 1600 25 (M 25) 20
NSO0_00578
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/19

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00459 NSO0_00460
10000 Ir 10000 Ir
min. max.
TV min. max.
M
5000 5000
t [s] Ir tr Ii t [s] Ir tr Ii
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500 25
200 200
L tr L tr
100 100
30
50 50
30
25
20 20 15 15
10 10 10 10
In = 630 A In = 630 A 8 8
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
3 3 3 3
In = 1250 A In = 1250 A
2 2
In = 1600 A In = 1600 A
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
In = 630 A 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 I i [kA] In = 630 A 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 0.05
In = 1000 A 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA] In = 1000 A 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 18
0.05 18
In = 1250 A 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA] In = 1250 A 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 17 0.05 17
In = 1600 A 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 20 I i [kA] In = 1600 A 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 20 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
5/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in ad- ting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
vance. selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.
The 3VT95..-6AD00 trip unit is intended for the Reaching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the
3VT5716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit only. The trip unit is equip- front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir.
ped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a "re- The bottom part of the trip unit cover contains photocells for
start" switch on the front panel from the position T(t) to position communicating with the 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit.
T(0). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit re-
mains active.
A practical advantage of the trip unit is its maximum flexibility for
adjusting the tripping characteristic. With its possibility for set-

Article No. Rated current Overload protec- tr (7.2 x Ir) Short delayed short tsd I2t Restart Instantaneous short
In tion Ir circuit protection circuit protection Ii
Isd A = (n x Ir)
A A s n ms kA
250, 260 0.5 2 50, 100 0.8
275, 290 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
305, 315 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9563-6AD00 630 345, 360 7 7 800, 1000 2.5
400, 435 10 8 50, 100 4.5
455, 480 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
500, 550 20 10 400, 600 7.5
575, 630 25 ∞ 800, 1000 10
400, 435 0.5 2 50, 100 1.25
455, 480 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 2
500, 550 5 5 400, 600 3
3VT9510-6AD00 1000 575, 630 7 7 800, 1000 5
630, 685
720, 760
10
15
8
9
50, 100
200, 300 off T(t)
7
9
5
800, 870 20 10 400, 600 12
910, 1000 25 ∞ 800, 1000 15
500, 550 0.5 2 50,1 00 1.5
577, 610 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 3
630, 685 5 5 400, 600 5
3VT9512-6AD00 1250 722, 760 7 7 800, 1000 7
800, 866 10 8 50, 100 9
909, 1000 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 12
1100, 1155, 20 10 400, 600 15
1200, 1250 25 ∞ 800, 1000 18
630, 685 0.5 2 50, 100 2
720, 800 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 4
870, 910 5 5 400, 600 6
3VT9516-6AD00 1600 1000, 1100 7 7 800, 1000 8
1155, 1200 10 8 50, 100 11
1250, 1300 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 14
1375, 1445 20 10 400, 600 17
1500, 1600 25 ∞ 800, 1000 20
NSO0_00579
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/21

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU UP
_ _
10000 min max.
10000 min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max 200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max

L L
100 100
50 50
20 In = 630 A 20 In = 630 A
In = 1000 A In = 1000 A
10 In = 10
1250 A In = 1250 A
5 In = 1600 A 5 In = 1600 A
2 2 S
S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5 0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5

tsd [ms] I tsd [ms] I
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) 0.2 (I 2 t = ON)
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA] In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720
0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1600 A I i [kA] In = 1600 A I i [kA]
5
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
5/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU UP
NSO0_0046 NSO0_0046
10000 min. max.
10000 min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 …10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 0) x Ir min
500 500
Isd = (2 …10) x Ir max Isd = (2 … 0) x Ir max
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 In = 630 A 25 25
20 In = 630 A 25 25
In = 1000 A In = 1000 A
10 In = 1250 A tr [s] 10 In = 1250 A tr [s]
5 In = 1600 A 5 In = 1600 A
3 3 3 3
2 S 2 S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5
tsd [ms] I tsd [ms] I
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) 0.2 (I 2 t = ON)
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18 0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720
0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1600 A I i [kA] In = 1600 A I i [kA]
5
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/23

© Siemens AG 2014

Signalling units
■ Overview
The 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit is a modular accessory for • Remote indication on the state of the circuit breaker and the
the 3VT4 and 3VT5 circuit breakers and operates in conjunction protected circuit is ensured by a relay, the make and break
with 3VT95..-6AC00, 3VT95..-6AP00 and 3VT95..-6AD00 elect- contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip on the unit
ronic trip units. - relays to indicate tripping of time-dependent or undercurrent
• It is intended for applications in automated control systems and time-independent trip units have storage
- after the storage relay is activated by tripping,
• The signalling unit signals reaching a certain current value in it is necessary to reset the relay by actuating the front panel
a circuit and the tripping of the circuit breaker by trip units RESET switch, or to reset remotely by an external pushbut-
(time-dependent, time-independent, undercurrent) ton.
- The user has options to set up (by steps, using a rotary
switch) a current value which will be indicated when reached • The supply voltages are presented in the table
- the options are 70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160 or 180% Ir • The main power supply circuit and the reset circuit are not
(refer to the table below for more details). safely separated
• Local indication regarding the state of the circuit breaker and • The external RESET button must be connected with a
the protected circuit is signaled by LED indicators located on screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum loop resis-
the front panel of the signalling unit tance of 100 Ohm.
• The information on the state of the circuit breaker is transferred The signalling unit will not work without power supply!
from the trip unit to the signalling unit by means of optical cou-
pling
Specifications
Article No. 3VT9500-6AE00
Rated operating voltage Ue AC/DC 12 ... 230 V
Protection (tube fuse) T1.5 A
Current draw (rms) max. at Ue
AC-15 AC/DC 12 V 370 mA
DC-13 AC/DC 24 V 170 mA
AC/DC 48 V 100 mA
AC/DC 110 V 60 mA
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 50 mA
Rated operating current AC-1 8 A/AC 230 V
(of relay contacts) Ie/Ue DC-1 0.25 A DC 250 V, 8 A/DC 30 V
0.5 ... 1 mm2
5
Connection cross-section S
Main circuit status indication

Signalling
(relay contacts) LED
Reaching < 70% Ir -- +
110% Ir + +
70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180 -- +
Settings + +
Tripping By time-dependent/undercurrent trip + +/+
unit
By time-independent trip unit + +
N
M
AC/DC Energia 3~ 3 < m
12 - 230 V RESET
NSO0_00465
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1, 2 supply
6, 7 external RESET button
9, 10, 11 relay contacts indicating preset Ir
12, 13, 14 relay contacts indicating reaching 110% Ir
15, 16, 17 relay contacts indicating tripping by time-
dependent or undercurrent trip units
18, 19, 20 relay contacts indicating tripping by independent
trip unit (instantaneous or delayed tripping)
5/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Auxiliary switches
Article No. 3VT9500-2AF10 3VT9500-2AF201)
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 60 ...500 V AC 5 ...60 V
DC 60 ...240 V DC 5 ...60 V
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500
Rated operating current Ie/Ue
AC-15 6 A/60 V ... 240 V, AC-12, DC-12
3 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V,
1.5 A/500 V 0.004 ...0.01/60V
DC-13 1 A/60 V,
0.7 A/110 V,
0.3 A/240 V
Thermal current Ith A 6A 0.5 A
Connection cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
(connected switch)
1)
3VT9500-2AF20 is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types

22 2+2 break + make

cavities
Switch location Switch name Switch function
accessory Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of the main
compartment 1, 2 contacts
accessory Relative switch to indicate tripping of circuit breaker
compartment 3, 4 by trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by
motor releases 5
Wiring diagram
Switches
auxiliary auxiliary relative relative
3VT9500-2AF10 1.13
1.21
1.31
1.43
3VT9500-2AF10 2.13
2.21
2.31
2.43
3VT9500-2AF10 3.13
3.21
3.31
3.43
3VT9500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
NSO0_00466a
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
acc.comp. No. 1 acc. comp. No. 2 acc. comp. No. 3 acc. comp. No. 4
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/25

© Siemens AG 2014

Shunt trip units
L+
Article No. 3VT9500-1S.00
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
DC 24, 48, 110, 220
3VT9500-1S.00
C1
Input power at 1.1 Ue
AC < 2.5 VA
DC <2W
Characteristic U ≥ 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must U
trip
Time to switch-off ms 20
NSO0_00467b
C2
Continuous load Yes
2
Connection cross-section S mm 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection IP20 N-
(connected trip units)
Location in accessory com- 5
partment No.
Circuit breaker switched off by shunt trip unit

NSO0_00470
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
compartment
accessory
30
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13
0 Reaction time of the shunt trip
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
30
1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
2.22 2.21
0 1
Relative switch
5
2.32 2.31
0
compartment
accessory
30 >50
NSO0_00583
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
3.14 3.13
0
4.14 4.13 Relative switch 1
4.44 4.43 OK
0
30 t [ms]
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31 t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers

Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers
Switched on

the motor drive
Switched off manually or electrically
by drive
5/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit
Article No. 3VT9500-1U.00
Rated operating V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
voltage Ue DC 24, 48, 110, 220 Switched on
Input power at 1.1 Ue < 2.5 VA
<2W
Characteristic U ≥ 0.85 Ue, the motor drive
circuit breaker can switch on
U ≥ 0.35 Ue, Switched off manually or electrically
the circuit breaker must trip by drive
Time to switched-off ms 20
Continuous load Yes
Connection mm2 0.5 ... 1
cross-section S
compartment No.
Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit

NSO0_00470
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0 Reaction time of the undervoltage trip unit
Auxiliary switch
compartment
accessory
30
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13
0 1
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
0
30 >50
1.32 1.31 1 I201_18897
5
1.22 1.21
2.22 2.21
0 1
2.32
Relative switch OK
2.31 0
compartment
t [ms]
accessory
30
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13
0
Relative switch
4.44 4.43
30
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31 t [ms]
L+
3VT9500-1U.00
D1
U<
NSO0_00471b
D2
N-
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/27

© Siemens AG 2014

Rotating the hand drive lever located on the rotary operating me- • In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical
chanism switches circuit breakers 3VT4 to 3VT5 on and off, e.g. equipment, the coupling driver is furnished with a locking fea-
for switching electrical equipment on and off. Modular design of ture which prevents the cabinet from being opened when the
the drives enables easy installation on the circuit breaker after circuit breaker is in closed position.
removing the accessory compartment cover from the circuit • When the circuit breaker in position "manual open", the drive
breaker. The rotary operating mechanism and its accessories handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder type lock
must be ordered separately, see page 5/5. (FAB) and as many as three padlocks with shank diameter up
• The coupling driver operates the circuit breaker through the to 7 mm.
front panel or through the cabinet door, the outlet for the oper- • When the drive lever is in position "manual open", it is possible
ating shaft features protection class IP44 or IP66 (for bear- to remove the hand drive lever.
ings). • The circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can be
• The hand drive lever can be furnished with an extension shaft equipped with a mechanical interlocking system, see next
which makes it possible to control the circuit breaker in deeper page.
cabinets.
Specifications
Switchgear door locking in
circuit breaker state
Article number Description Color Lockable with padlock when Protection Switched on and off by trip unit Length mm
circuit breaker is in OFF state class
3VT9500-3HA10 Rotary operating mecha- -- yes -- -- --
nism
3VT9500-3HE10 Hand drive lever black yes -- -- --
3VT9500-3HF10 Hand drive lever red yes -- -- --
3VT9500-3HG10 Coupling driver -- -- IP44 yes --
3VT9500-3HG20 Coupling driver -- -- IP66 yes --
3VT9500-3HJ10 Extension shaft -- -- -- -- 365
5/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

3VT9500-8LA00 Mechanical interlocking • It provides interlocking of two circuit breakers so that they can-
not be switched on simultaneously, but always only one of
them.
• It is possible to use the locking device between two 3VT4 or
3VT5 circuit breakers or between 3VT4 and 3VT5 circuit
breakers. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a rotary
operating mechanism (at least with the hand drive unit and
hand drive lever), see page 5/5. In order to use locking, it is
necessary to adhere to the dimensions.
314
4xØ9
NSO0_00472
NSO0_00473
50 70 190 70
3VT9500-8LC10 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden

• Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so
5
that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one
of them at a time.
• Interlocking can be used between two 3VT4 or 3VT5 circuit
breakers or between a 3VT4 and a 3VT5 circuit breaker. For in-
terlocking, circuit breakers can be outfitted with a rotary or mo-
torized operating mechanism. To use interlocking, it is abso-
lutely necessary to comply with the dimensions shown below.
Type of mechanical interlocking Combination of circuit breaker/switch

disconnector versions
3VT9500-8LC10 fixed-mounted - fixed-mounted
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden between fixed-mounted and
3VT9500-8LC30 fixed-mounted - withdrawable
withdrawable 3VT5 circuit breakers
3VT9500-8LC40 withdrawable - withdrawable
Dimensions:
R min
72.5
75
= 75
140 =
in
130 Ø 2.3 R m
125.9
47
OK
ON
ON
31
OFF
OFF
NSO0_00474
0 or 350 ... 1400
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/29

© Siemens AG 2014

The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring Specifications
storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible
to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 70 ms. Releasing the Article number 3VT9500-3M...0
spring energy and turning on the circuit breaker is ensured by a Operational voltage Ue V AC 110, 230
closing coil. The motorized operating mechanism can trip the DC 110, 220
circuit breaker in approx. 10 s. This method of tripping is suitable Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
for most technological applications. When faster circuit breaker
tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button Control pulse length for switching on ms > 20 ... 1500 ∞1
was pressed), it is possible to use the motorized mechanism in Control pulse length for switching off ms > 20 ... ∞1)
combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit.
Time to switching on ms < 70
• The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a
selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the Time to the accumulating of
motor drive under voltage Ue
possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state.
- The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in • AC 230 V s 14
position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic • DC 220 V s 18
operation.
- The second mode is manual control (selector switch position Time to switch-off Ue
MANUAL). In manual mode the motorized operating mecha- • AC 230 V s 10
nism does not need any voltage to perform perform open-
ing/closing operations • DC 220 V s 12
• Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out Frequency of ON/OFF cycles cycles/ 2
with pushbuttons that must be connected to the motorized op- min
erating mechanism connector. When the motorized operating Frequency of cycles - immediately cycles 8
mechanism is in MANUAL mode, the circuit breaker can be one after another ON/OFF
switched on using the green button on the front part of the mo-
torized operating mechanism cover and to switch it off with the
red TEST button on the trip unit. The function of the remote Input power
control ON button in MANUAL MODE is locked up, whereas • AC VA 200
the function of the remote control OFF button remains active
for safety reasons. • DC W 200
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it simple to con- Protection
trol the circuit breaker when there is a loss of control voltage.
In MANUAL mode, it is possible to wind up the spring storage • AC 110 V; AC 230 V 5SX4104-7; 5SX4102-7
assembly by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After the • DC 110 V; DC 220 V 5SX5104-7; 5SX5102-7
storage is wound up, the circuit breaker can be turned on us-
Rated operating current of the switch V 6 A/AC 250
5
ing the green button on the front part of the insulation cover of selector AUTO / MANUAL Ie/Ue
the drive and it can be turned off using the red TEST button on
1)
the trip unit. for sequence of control pulses, see page 5/33.
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir-
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions:
- In the first position, the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit
breaker is tripped in AUTO mode by a trip unit, auxiliary trip
devices or from a distance, the 3VT9500-2AF10 switch (in-
cluded in motorized operating mechanism delivery) will gen-
erate a pulse to load the spring storage mechanism automat-
ically. If the switch is placed in accessory compartment 3 or
4, automatic loading process will take place.
- In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off
and the loaded motorized operating mechanism is ready to
activate the circuit breaker after receiving the control pulse.
• The presence of the control voltage in the drive is indicated by
a steadily lit green LED indicator below the drive plate. If the
indicator is not lit, the position of the circuit breaker lever need
not comply with the correct positions of the power contacts.
• The motorized operating mechanism may be furnished with
an electromechanical operations counter.
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked up in off-
state position using the built-in cylinder type lock and using as
many as three padlocks with the shank diameter max. 7 mm.
Before the drive is locked up, it is necessary to turn the drive
unit switch to MANUAL mode position, to withdraw the drive (Reset Red Led): If the circuit breaker is not stored by motor
unit yellow lockup strip and to insert the padlock shank into the drive until 30 s., e.g. due to undervoltage, extremely low tempe-
oval opening in the lockup strip. When a cylinder type lock is rature, mechanical or electrical failure, the LED diode on the
used, the lockup strip will stick out a little. front panel is shining in red. During the lighting of the red LED,
• An 3VT9500-3MF20 cover can be affixed to the motorized the mechanism is disconnected electronically, and cannot be
operating mechanism’s turn-on switch and then sealed. The remotly controlled. In order to restore remote control it is neces-
cover prevents turning on the circuit breaker from the motor- sary to disconnected the motor operated mechanism for 30 s. At
ized operating mechanism panel. tripping of the circuit breaker by the overcurrent release, by
auxiliary releases, or by TEST push button (in mode AUTO), the
motorized operating mechanism automatically accumulates
energy (circuit breaker loading), motorized operating mecha-
nism is then ready to switch on the circuit breaker.
5/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Specifications Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanism-
electrically by pushbutton OFF
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism-
electrically by pushbutton ON
NSO0_00529b
Main contacts
NSO0_00528
Main contacts 2 1 10000 - 12000
4 3 1
6 5
2 1 70 0
4 3 1 Auxiliary switch
6 5
0
compartment
10000 - 12000
accessory
Auxiliary switch
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
compartment
1.14 1.13
60
accessory
0
1.44 1.43 1 2.14 2.13
Auxiliary switch
1+2
1.14 1.13 2.44 2.43
2.14 2.13
0
Auxiliary switch 10000 - 12000
2.44 2.43 1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
60 0
1.32 1.31 1 2.22 2.21 Relative switch
1.22 1.21 2.32 2.31
0
compartment
2.22 2.21 Relative switch
accessory
2.32 2.31 3.44 3.43 1
3+4
compartment
3.14 3.13
0
accessory
3.44 3.43 1 4.14 4.13 Relative switch
3+4
3.14 3.13 4.44 4.43
4.14
0
4.13 Relative switch
4.44 4.43 3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
0
3.32 3.31 1 4.22 4.21
t [ms]
3.22 3.21 4.32 4.31
4.22
0
4.21
t [ms]
4.32 4.31 Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motor driver
- electrically by pushbutton ON and pushbutton OFF
Control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
B OFF
Motor drive Switches
relative 5
3VT9500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10 4.43
5 7 3 4 1 3
NC NO
SSI
C
M P
NSO0_00476a
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
MP 6 2 1
acc.c. 4
6 2 9
X3
N-
Circuit breaker states and Lever positions of circuit breakers

Switched on
Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST

button

drive
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/31

© Siemens AG 2014

Specifications
Symbol Description
Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha-
MP 3VT9500-3M...0 motorized operating mechanism nism by shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit
M Motor
NSO0_00530b
Main contacts
2 1 20
X3 Connector to connect auxiliary circuits 4 3 1
6 5
0
SSI Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C) modes Auxiliary switch
compartment
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in
accessory
30
delivery) 1.44 1.43 1
1+2
1.14 1.13
ON Make pushbutton 2.14 2.13
0
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
OFF Break pushbutton 30
1.32 1.31 1
S Switch for energy storage 1.22 1.21
(switched on = automatic storage, may be 2.22 2.21
0
Relative switch
continuously switched on) 2.32 2.31
compartment
accessory
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism 30 8000
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
3.14 3.13
4.14
0
4.13 Relative switch
4.44 4.43
30 8000
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31
t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers

Switched on
Switched off (TRIP) by trip unit, or by

TEST button

drive
5
Symbol Description
MP Motorized operating mechanism 3VT9500-3M...0
M Motor
X3 Connector to connect auxiliary circuits
SSI Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C)
modes
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not inclu-
ded in delivery)
ON Make pushbutton
5/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Wiring diagram Specifications
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism Recommended actuating pulses
(electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by shunt trip unit
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha-
nism
Control circuit
NSO0_00479
Q3 10000 … 12000 70
L+ 1
HK
0
ON
10000 … 12000 > 10000
PS 1
B OFF
0
> 100
Motor drive Switches Aux. trip unit > 20000
20 … ∞ 20 … 1500
1
relative IMP OFF IMP ON
0
t [ms]
3VT9500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
C1
D1
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10 Circuit breaker switched off by trip units or shunt/undervoltage

3VT9500-1U.00
3VT9500-1S.00 trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism-S

5 7 3 4 1 3
switch permanently closed
NC NO
NSO0_00480a
70
SSI or HK 1
C M P U< U 0
8000 > 12000

NSO0_00477a
RS 1
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
0
D2
C2
MP 6 2 1 > 20000
acc.c. 4 acc.c. 5 20 … 1500
1
IMP ON
6 2 9 0
X3 t [ms]
R OFF
N- N-
5
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers
(electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by undervoltage trip
unit Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers
Control circuit Switched on
Q3
L+ Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST
ON motor drive
OFF drive
B
Motor drive Switches Aux. trip unit
Description of charts
relative
Symbol Description
4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
C1
D1
HK main contacts
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
PS auxiliary switch
3VT9500-2AF10
3VT9500-1U.00
3VT9500-1S.00
5 7 3 4 1 3 RS relative switch
R OFF circuit breaker closed instantly by trip unit
NC NO
IMP S pulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S
switch)
SSI or IMP ON make pulse for motor drive
C
M P U< U
IMP OFF break pulse for motor drive
X random segment of time
NSO0_00478a
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
D2
C2
MP 6 2 1
acc.c. 4 acc.c. 5
6 2 9
X3
N- N-
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/33

© Siemens AG 2014

Insulating barriers
■ Overview
B = 310 C = 134.5 Withdrawable version
Front connection
• terminals 1, 3, 5 (upper side)
If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit
breaker/switch disconnector is connected on the upper side,
A = 100 using clamp or block type terminals, 3VT9500-8CF30 insulat-
ing barriers must always be installed.
In all other cases, we recommend installing 3VT9500-8CC30
50 insulating covers on the upper side of the circuit breaker.
• terminals 2, 4, 6 ( bottom side)
If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit
breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the bottom side
of the circuit breaker using clamp or block type terminals,
350
ON
3VT9500-8CF30 insulating barriers must always be installed.

In all other cases, we recommend installing 3VT9500-8CC30
OFF
insulating covers on the bottom side of the withdrawable ver-
sion base.
NSO0_00522
210
A, B, C - minimum deionizing space, free of earthed metal parts

Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit
breakers and switch disconnectors.
Fixed-mounted version
Front connection
3VT9500-8CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed on
5
circuit breakers/switch disconnectors.
• Terminals 2, 4, 6 (bottom side)
- If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the
supply using terminals 2, 4, 6, 3VT9500-8CE30
insulating barriers must always be installed on it.
- If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected on
the bottom side using clamp or block type terminals,
3VT9500-8CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed
on it.
Rear connection
3VT9500-8CD30 insulating covers or 3VT9500-8CE30
insulating barriers must always be installed on the circuit brea-
ker/switch disconnector.
We recommend installing 3VT9500-8CG30 insulating grommets

with all sets for rear connection.
• terminals 2, 4, 6 (bottom side)
If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the
bottom side using clamp or block type terminals,
3VT9500-8CD30 insulating barriers must always be installed on
circuit breaker.
We recommend installing 3VT9500-8CG30 insulating grommets

with all sets for rear connection.
5/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ 3VT4/3VT5 Dimensional drawings - fixed-mounted version

142.5
134.5 3VT4
70 70 35.5 3VT5
200
3
4 x M8
148
15°
72
314
ON
7°
100
240
300
350
494
21°
51
OFF
56.5
NSO0_00393
4xØ9
148
80
72
18
50 35.5 16 70 70
210 134.5
157 7
Drilling pattern
12.5
4 x Ø 10.5
5
50
NSO0_00397
+1
25 0
+1
25 0
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection

(3VT9500-4RC30, 3VT9400-4RC30 connecting sets) Openings for insulation grommets
70 70 84.5 142.5 200
60
BL1600S 16
BL1000S 8
R4
356
436
ON
444
510
OFF
NSO0_00398
50
60
82
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/35

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (3VT9524-4TG30 connecting sets)
- not for 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit
134.5
250
3
200
750
350
627
ON
OFF
NSO0_00512
138.5
80 23
133
Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (3VT9524-4TG30 and 3VT9524-4TF30 connecting sets)
- not for 3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 switching units
134.5
250
3
5
200
750
350
627
ON
OFF
NSO0_00401
138.5
80 136
5/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, block type terminals (3VT9532-4TF30)
134.5
205 52.5
3 35.5
NSO0_00403
200
750
582
350
ON
OFF
TEST
116
65 Ø 26
75.5

134.5
205 52.5 32
3 35.5
5
NSO0_00405
200
750
350
ON
626
OFF
TEST
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
107.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/37

© Siemens AG 2014

134.5
205 52.5 32
3 35.5
NSO0_00407
200
750
350
ON
626
OFF
TEST
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
107.5
Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Knob - lockable

(3VT9500-3HE10, 3VT9500-3HF10)
46
5
NSO0_00409a
1
28°
2
72
12°
72
148
R1
60
40°
1 3VT9500-3HA10
196 2 3VT9500-3H.10
50
5/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Cabinet door cut-out
46
1 3VT4/3VT5
1
2 3VT9500-3HA10
NSO0_00412a
3 3VT9500-3HJ10
2 4 3VT9500-3HG.0
4 min. 200 5 3VT9500-3H.10
28
Ø 40 6 Control cabinet door
3 4 x Ø 5.4
90
5 28
28
28
Hinge of control
cabinet door
19.5 50
6
90 198
min. 267
max. 500
3VT9300-8LA00 mechanical interlocking Cabinet door cut-out
min. 200 260
28
2 x Ø 40
314
28
28
28
5
8 x Ø 5.4
Hinge of
NSO0_00415
4xØ9 control cabinet door
50 70 190 70
Fixed-mounted version, motorized operating mechanism 3VT9500-3M..0, lockable with up to three padlocks
33
8
R8
114
235
NSO0_00418
134.5 73
268.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/39

© Siemens AG 2014

Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9500-6AE00 signalling unit
Description see page 5/24.
ON
417
OFF
NSO0_00421
31
142,5
5/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

■ Dimensional drawings - withdrawable version

3VT9500-4WA40 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern
292
max. 140
4xØ9
350
180
100
314
NSO0_00423
508
4xØ9
125
210 75 140 35 70 70
18
248 174
Withdrawable version, front connection (3VT9500-4EF30 connecting sets)

70 70
4 x M8
33.5
350
494
33.5
5
NSO0_00427
72
50 27.5 16
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/41

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, rear connection Drilling pattern
(3VT9500-4RC30 connecting set)
106.5
16
max. 140
230 4xØ9
100
125
NSO0_00430
50
140 35
Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (3VT9524-4TG30 connecting set)

250
350
627
5
NSO0_00433
138.5
31
80 133
5/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (3VT9524-4TG30 and 3VT9524-4TF30 connecting set)
250
350
627
NSO0_00435
138.5
80 128
Withdrawable version, block type terminals (3VT9532-4TF30)

137
205 45
3 28
NSO0_00437
200
5
750
350
582
116
65 Ø 26
68
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/43

© Siemens AG 2014

137
205 45 32
3 28
NSO0_00439
750
350
626
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
100

137
205 45 32
3 28
5
NSO0_00441
750
350
626
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
100
5/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014

Withdrawable version Connected Disconnected
292 295 340
65
350
180
ON
508
OFF
NSO0_00443
210 75 75 45
248 174 174

239 284
Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected

rotary operating mechanism
321 366
NSO0_00446
271 316
Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected

3VT9500-3MQ00 motorized
operating mechanism
343.5 33 388.5 33
NSO0_00449
282.5 327.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 5/45

© Siemens AG 2014

Notes
5/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

6
© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
6/2 Glossary
6/3 Catalog notes
6/4 Ordering notes
6/6 Further documentation
6/11 Quality management
6/12 Standards and approvals
6/16 Siemens contacts
6/17 Service & Support
6/18 Comprehensive support

from A to Z
6/19 Software licenses
6/21 Subject index
6/22 Article No. index

incl. export markings
6/26 Conditions of sale and delivery
© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Glossary
Rated operating voltage, (Ue) Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1 determination, as may also the utilization category. Along with the
rated (operating) current, it determines the device’s utilization. The
highest value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater
than the value of the rate insulation voltage Ui.
Rated insulation voltage, (Ui) Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2 creepage distance.
Rated current, (In) Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninter-
EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3 ruptedly. The highest current valued tripping the circuit breaker in
conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic.
Reduced rated current, (Ir) Specifically established, reduced value of In current for a regulated
time-dependent (thermal) trip unit and that the circuit breaker can
handle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to In.
Changing Ir shifts the trip unit’s tripping characteristic along the
current axis. (Ir = k x In holds where k ≤ 1)
Tripping time at a given Ir multiple, (tr) Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that
is equal to the given multiple of Ir. Changing tr shifts the tripping
characteristic along the time axis.
Actuating current of (selective) release’s Minimum current value causing the release’s time-independent delay
time-independent delay, (Ids) to actuate.
Delay of time-independent delayed release, (tv) If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least Isd but not
reaching Irm the circuit breaker will trip with time delay tv. Total shut-off
time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker itself and is
about 10 ÷ 20 ms longer.
Actuating current of time-independent Minimum current value causing the time-independent instantaneous
instantaneous, (Irm) release to actuate.
Rated operating current, (Ie) Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3 manufacturer with consideration for the rated operating voltage, rated
frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of protective
cover, if that comes into consideration.
Rated normal current, (Iu) Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4 handle in continuous operation, i.e. during a period longer than 8 hours
(weeks, months, or longer).
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, (Icu) Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity value expressed as the rms
EN 60947-2; 2.15.1; 4.3.5.2.1 value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current
that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: 1x swit-
6
ching off of the short circuit and a following 1x make-break sequence.
After testing, the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct the rated
current uninterruptedly. Icu is set for the rated operating voltage at the
rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating
current or at the time constant for direct current. Must fulfil the
condition: Icu ≥ Ik“
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity, (Ics) Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the
EN 60947-2; 2.15.2; 4.3.5.2.2 rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit
current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode:
1x switching off of the short circuit and a following 2x make-break
sequence. May also be expressed as a percentage of Icu. After
testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to conduct the
rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase
of the main terminals may be greater. Ics is set for the rated operating
voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for
alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted:
Ics ≥ Ik“
Rated short-time withstand current, (Icw) Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.1 that the device is able to handle without damage during a designated
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.4 time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it is the
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.1 rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit
current Ip.
6/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Catalog notes
■ Overview
Trademarks
All product designations may be registered trademarks or prod-
uct names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by
third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the
owner.
Amendments
All technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to
change without notice unless specified on the pages of this
catalog.
Dimensions
All dimensions are in mm.
Images
The illustrations are not binding.
Technical data
The technical data in the catalog are for general information. The
instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the prod-
ucts must be observed during assembly, operation and mainte-
nance.
Further technical information is available at
• under Product List:
- Technical specifications
• under Entry List:
- Updates
- Downloads
- FAQ
- Manuals/operating instructions
- Characteristic curves
- Certificates
Configurators can be found under
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/configurators
Assembly, operation and maintenance
The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the
products must be observed during assembly, operation and
maintenance.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/3

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Ordering notes
■ Logistics
General Packaging, packing units
With regard to delivery service, communications and environ- The packaging in which our devices are dispatched provides
mental protection, our logistics service ensures "quality from the protection against dust and mechanical damage during trans-
moment of ordering right through to delivery". By designing our port, thus ensuring that you receive our products in perfect con-
infrastructure according to customer requirements and imple- dition.
menting electronic order processing, we have successfully opti-
mized our logistics processes. We select our packaging for maximum environmental compati-
bility and reusability (e.g. crumpled paper instead of polystyrene
We are proud of our personal consulting service, on-time deliv- chips for protection during transport in packages up to 32 kg)
eries and 1-day transport within Germany. and, in particular, with a view to reducing waste.
To this end, we supply the preferred types marked With our multi-unit packaging and reusable packaging, we offer
with } ex works. you specific types of packaging that are both kind to the environ-
ment and tailored to your requirements:
We regard the DIN ISO 9001 certification and consistent quality
checks as an integral part of our services. Your advantages at a glance:
Electronic order processing is fast, cost-effective and error-free. • Lower order costs.
Please contact us if you want to benefit from these advantages. • Cost savings through uniform-type packaging: low/no dis-
posal costs.
• Reduced time and cost thanks to short unpacking times.
• "Just-in-time" delivery directly to the production line helps re-
duce stock: cost savings through reduction of storage area.
• Fast assembly thanks to supply in sets.
• Standard Euro boxes - corresponding to the Euro pallet mod-
ular system - suitable for most conveyor systems.
• Active contribution to environmental protection.
Unless stated otherwise in the "Selection and ordering data" of

this catalog, our products are supplied individually packed.
For small parts/accessories, we offer you economical pack-
aging units as standard packs containing more than one
item, e.g. 5, 10, 50 or 100 units. It is essential that whole num-
ber multiples of these quantities be ordered to ensure satis-
factory quality of the products and problem-free order pro-
cessing.
The products are delivered in a neutral carton. The label in-
cludes warning notices, the CE mark, the open arrow recycling
symbol, and product description information in English and Ger-
man. In addition to the Article No. (MLFB) and the number of
items in the packaging, the Instr. Article No. is also specified for
the operating instructions. It can be obtained from your local Sie-
mens representative (you will find a list of your local Siemens
representatives at www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
6 The device Article No. of most devices can also be acquired
through the EAN barcode to simplify ordering and storage logis-
tics.
The Article Nos. and EAN codes are assigned electronically in
the master data of the products for low-voltage power distribu-
tion and electrical installation.
6/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Ordering notes
■ Overview
Ordering special versions Ordering very small quantities
When ordering products that differ from the standard versions When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order
listed in the catalog, "–Z" must be added to the Article No. indi- processing are greater than the order value. We therefore rec-
cated and the required features must be specified using alpha- ommend that you combine several small orders. Where this is
numeric order codes or plain text. not possible, we regret that we are obliged to make a small pro-
cessing charge: for orders with a net goods value of less than
€ 250 we charge a € 20 supplement to cover our order process-
ing and invoicing costs.
Explanations on the Selection and Ordering Data
Delivery time class (DT)
Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched
DT Meaning within 24 hours.
} Preferred type If ordered in normal quantities, the products are usually delivered within the specified delivery times, calcu-
lated from the date we receive your order.
A Two workdays
In exceptional cases, delivery times may vary from those specified.
B One week
The delivery times are valid ex works from Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch).
C Three weeks
Shipping times depend on the destination and the method of shipping. The standard shipping time for Ger-
D Six weeks
many is one day.
X On request
The specified delivery times are correct at the time of going to print and are subject to constant optimiza-
tion. Up-to-date information can be found at www.siemens.com/industrymall.
Price units (PU)
The price unit defines the number of units, sets or meters to which the specified price and weight apply.
PS/P. unit (packaging size/packaging unit)
The packaging size / packaging unit defines the number, e.g. of units, sets or meters, for outer packaging:
• The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this
specified quantity or a multiple thereof.
• The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging
(e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the article to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity.
Examples:
PS/P. unit Meaning

1 unit You can order one article or a multiple thereof.
5 units For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of
the quantity contained in the bag: 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
5/100 units One carton contains (for example) 20 bags, each containing 5 units, i.e. a total of 100 units. If only cartons are avail-
able for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity: 100, 200, 300, etc.
Ordering a quantity of 220 units would result in the following delivery: two cartons, each containing 100 units (= 200
units) and 4 bags, each containing 5 units (= 20 units).
1 set A set comprises a defined number of different parts.
Price groups (PG)
Each product is allocated to a price group.
6
Weight
The defined weight is the net weight in kg and refers to the price unit (PU).
Example
DT Article No. Price PS*/ Weight DT Article No. Price PS*/ Weight
per PU P. unit per PU per PU P. unit per PU
approx. approx.
3VT2725-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 3,314 3VT2725-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 3,330
PS*/ 1 = minimum order quantity PS*/ 1 = minimum order quantity

P. unit P. unit
Weight The net weight in kg Weight The net weight in kg
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/5

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Further documentation
■ Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology on the WWW

Siemens low-voltage power distribution and electrical installa-
tion technology offers switchboards, distribution boards, protec-
tion, switching, measuring and monitoring devices, switches
and socket outlets. All over the world, the universality, modularity
and intelligence of our components and systems give you innu-
merable benefits – for the entire duration of their service life.
Developed according to the respective international standards,
we offer forward-looking designs with innovative functions and
ensure the highest quality standards around the globe.
We regard product support as just as important as the products
and systems themselves.
Visit our site on the Internet for a comprehensive offering of
support for low-voltage power distribution and electrical
installation products, such as
• Operating instructions and manuals for direct download
• Online registration for seminars and events
• Up-to-date answers to your queries and problems
• Software upgrades and updates for fast download
• Telephone assistance in more than 190 countries
• Photos and graphics for external use
and much more - all conveniently and easily accessible:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
■ Information and download center

You will find regularly updated information material such as
catalogs, customer magazines, brochures and trial versions of
software for low-voltage power distribution and electrical
installation on the Internet at
Here, you can order your copy of the available documentation or
download it in common file formats (PDF, ZIP).
6/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
■ Product selection using the interactive catalog CA 01

Detailed information together with user-friendly interactive
functions:
The interactive catalog CA 01 with more than 80 000 products
provides a comprehensive overview of the product range from
Siemens Industry.
You can find everything you need here for solving automation,
switching, installation and drive technology tasks. All information
is offered over a user interface that is both user-friendly and
intuitive.
After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the
press of a button, by fax or by online link.
Information about the interactive catalog CA 01 can be found on
the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
or on DVD.
■ Industry Mall
The catalog and ordering system for Siemens automation and
drive technology and low-voltage power distribution and electri-
cal installation products. You can access this site round the
clock to find out everything you need to know about our product
portfolio – and much more besides. From intelligent tools de-
signed to simplify the configuring of products and systems to
software downloads and documentation.
By utilizing our personalized access service, you can make full
use of all the Industry Mall functions. Once you are registered,
our system provides you with a broad range of tools to help you
conduct your business with Siemens efficiently:
The Industry Mall - for online information, product selection
and ordering:
• Detailed information including product data, illustrations,
certificates and dimensional drawings
• Simple configuring of systems
• Possibility to request individualized quotations
• Availability check
• Online ordering facility
6
• Order tracking/order overview
• Fast access to relevant training offers and services
You can find the Industry Mall on the Internet at
www.siemens.com/industrymall
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/7

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
■ Industry Online Support

Whether you need help with implementing your project or you
want to expand your plant or plan a new one: Siemens Industry
Online Support will provide you with round-the-clock technical
assistance and allow you to access all the product information
and data that you need.
Your initial registration is free of charge. Once you are registered,
you can utilize the full scope of functions provided and benefit
from the useful online functions in mySupport.
You can also discuss any queries or requirements relating to
planning and design with our experts in the online forum.
Comprehensive support – at any time whatever your
location
• FAQs, sample applications, information about successor
products and product news
• Prompt assistance with technical queries
• Discussions and exchange of experience with other users in
the forum
• Provision of high-quality product data for your planning
programs
• Faster access to information – with helpful filter and folder
functions in mySupport
• Automatic notification service to keep you up to date with the
latest information about topics of interest to you
To find the link to the Service & Support portal, go to
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
■ Siemens Industry Online Support App

Whether you are out and about or standing right next to one of
our installations or machines – if you need product information,
you can access it at any time and from any location using the
Siemens Industry Online Support App – quick, easy and well
organized:
Scan in the product code, for example, and you will receive all
s Industry Online
Support App
the product information you need. You can send your search
results conveniently by e-mail to your work place or store them
in your Favorites folder for later offline retrieval.
6 The Siemens Industry Online Support App is available for

Android and iOS.
6/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
■ Product configurator
To help you find the right product for your application, Siemens
displays an overview of key product highlights on its web pages.
You can also call up detailed sample applications in the Siemens
Industry Online Support. Another important tool to help you
select the right components are the configurators for products
and systems.
By clicking a few options with the mouse, you will find yourself
guided by the configurator to a suitable product or system.
Simply enter the relevant parameters and select your solution.
You will be supplied with useful product data, such as 3D
models, circuit diagrams, certificates and operating instructions,
to help you plan the mechanical and electrical systems of the
configured solution. You can then export the generated product
list to Excel or place it in the shopping cart of the Siemens
Industry Mall ready for ordering.
The configurators are available online in the Siemens Industry
Mall and offline in catalog CA01. A product selection process
could hardly be made any faster or easier.
Find the right product faster using intuitive product
selection
• Complete selection of products and systems based on
technical characteristics or application requirements
• Simple, intuitive operation
• Option to save the configuration and order lists in a file format
of your choice (txt, pdf, xls, csv)
• Direct transfer of the order list into the shopping cart of the
Siemens Industry Mall
• Fast access to product data for the selected product and
system configuration
• Available in multiple languages for use by customers
anywhere in the world
You can find our configurators at the following website:

Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/9

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
■ CAx Download Manager

The 12 CAx data types are listed below:
The CAx Download Manager can supply you with all the neces-
Internal circuit Dimensional Operating sary CAx file types for the products of your choice for use in all
diagrams drawings instructions common CAE and CAD systems. The data contained in the files
Terminal connection
diagrams
3D models Product images is continuously updated. The whole process involves only four
Product selection steps and is free of charge. All the files you select will
Manuals Data sheets then be compiled into a zip file and made available for you to
master data
Characteristic Certificates EPLAN Electric download for further use.
curves P8 Macros
IC01_00265 This service will cut the time it takes you to integrate product
data into your CAE and CAD system by up to 80 %.
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/cax
Siemens makes available up to 12 file types to support your
mechanical (CAD) and electrical (CAE) planning processes for
you to download at any time of the day.
Universal product data for your CAE and CAD systems
reduces data integration time by up to 80 %
• No manual data collection necessary
• Universal manufacturer data for all common CAE and CAD
systems
• Standardized documentation is simple to generate
• Choice of different languages for system commissioning
anywhere in the world
6/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Quality management
■ Overview
The quality management system of our IC LMV LP Business Unit Certificates
complies with the international standard EN ISO 9001.
Information on the certificates available (CE, UL, CSA, FM,
The products and systems listed in this catalog are marketed shipping authorizations) for low-voltage power distribution and
using a VDE-approved quality management system according electrical installation products can be found on the Internet at
to ISO 9001.
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/product-support.
VDE certificate In the Entry List you can use the certificate type (general product
Siemens AG approval, explosion protection, test certificates, shipbuilding,...)
Infrastructure & Cities Sector as a filter criterion.
Low and Medium Voltage Division
Low Voltage & Products
Reg. No.: 40017/QM/03.06
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/11

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Standards and approvals
■ Overview
Approvals, test certificates, characteristic curves
An overview of the certificates available for low-voltage power
distribution and electrical installation products along with more
technical documentation can be consulted daily on the Internet
at
Product support: Approvals / Certificates Product support: Characteristic curves
Product standards (excerpt)

IEC EN DIN VDE Title
60947-1 60947-1 -- Low-voltage controlgear and switchgear: General rules
60947-2 60947-2 -- • Circuit breakers
60947-3 60947-3 -- • Switches, disconnectors, switch disconnectors and fuse-combination units
60947-4-1 60947-4-1 -- • Contactors and motor starters – Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
60947-4-2 60947-4-2 -- • Contactors and motor starters – Semiconductor motor controllers and starters, soft starters
60947-4-3 60947-4-3 -- • Contactors and motor starters – AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads
60947-5-1 60947-5-1 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices
60947-5-2 60947-5-2 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Proximity switches
60947-5-3 60947-5-3 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Requirements for proximity devices with
defined behaviour under fault conditions
60947-5-5 60947-5-5 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latch-
ing function
60947-5-6 60947-5-6 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – DC interface for proximity sensors and
6 60947-5-7 60947-5-7 --
switching amplifiers (NAMUR)
• Control circuit devices and switching elements – Requirements for proximity switches with
analog output
60947-5-8 60947-5-8 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Three-position enabling switches
60947-5-9 60947-5-9 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Flow rate switches
60947-6-1 60947-6-1 -- • Multiple function equipment – Transfer switching equipment
60947-6-2 60947-6-2 -- • Multiple function equipment – Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS)
60947-7-1 60947-7-1 -- • Ancillary equipment – Terminal blocks for copper conductors
60947-7-2 60947-7-2 -- • Ancillary equipment – Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors
60947-7-3 60947-7-3 -- • Ancillary equipment – Safety requirements for fuse terminal blocks
60947-8 60947-8 -- • Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating electrical machines
62026-2 50295 -- • Controller and device interface systems. Actuator-Sensor Interface (AS-i)
60269-1 60269-1 -- Low-voltage fuses – General requirements
60269-4 60269-4 -- Low-voltage fuses – Supplementary requirements for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor
devices
60050-441 -- -- International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Switchgear, controlgear and fuses
60439-1 60439-1 -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
61439-1 -- -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – General rules
61439-2 -- -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Particular requirements for busbar trunking
systems (busways)
-- 50274 -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Protection against electric shock - Protection
against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts
61140 61140 -- Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment
60664-1 60664-1 -- Insulation coordination for electrical equipment within low-voltage systems –
Principles, requirements and tests
6/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
IEC EN DIN VDE Title

60204-1 60204-1 -- Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – General requirements
-- 50178 -- Electronic equipment for use in power installations
60079-14 60079-14 -- Explosive atmospheres – Part 14: Electrical installations design, selection and erection
Installing electrical apparatus in potentially explosive gas atmospheres (except mining)
60079-2 60079-2 -- Explosive atmospheres – Part 2: Equipment protection by pressurized enclosures "p"
61810-1 61810-1 -- Electromechanical elementary relays – Part 1: General requirements
61812-1 61812-1 -- Specified time relays for industrial use – Part 1: Requirements and tests
60999-1 60999-1 -- Connecting devices – Electrical copper conductors – Safety requirements for screw-type and screwless-
type clamping units – Part 1: General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for con-
ductors from 0.2 mm2 to 35 mm2
61558-1 61558-1 0570-11) Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products –
- Part 1: General requirements and tests
61558-2-1 61558-2-1 0570-2-11) - Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies
incorporating separating transformers for general applications
1)
61558-2-2 61558-2-2 0570-2-2 - Part 2-2: Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies
incorporating control transformers
61558-2-4 61558-2-4 0570-2-41) - Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units
incorporating isolating transformers
61558-2-6 61558-2-6 0570-2-61) - Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units
incorporating safety isolating transformers
61558-2-9 61558-2-9 0570-2-91) - Part 2-9: Particular requirements and tests for transformers and power supply units for class III
handlamps for tungsten filament lamps
61558-2-12 61558-2-12 0570-2-121) - Part 2-12: Particular requirements for constant voltage transformers
61558-2-13 61558-2-13 0570-2-131) - Part 2-13: Particular requirements and tests for auto transformers and power supply units
incorporating auto transformers
61558-2-15 61558-2-15 0570-2-151) - Part 2-15: Particular requirements for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations
61558-2-20 61558-2-20 0570-2-201) - Part 2-20: Particular requirements and tests for small reactors
62041 62041 0570-101) Power transformers, power supply units, reactors and similar products – EMC requirements
60076-11 60076-11 -- Power transformers – Part 11: Dry-type transformers
-- -- 0552 Standards for variable-ratio transformers with moving contacts perpendicular to the coiling direction
61000-4-1 61000-4-1 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-1: Testing and measurement techniques – Overview
of IEC 61000-4 series
61000-6-3 61000-6-3 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-3: Generic standards – Emission standard for
residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
61000-6-4 61000-6-4 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-4: Generic standards – Emission standard for
industrial environments
60044-1 60044-1 -- Instrument transformers – Part 1: Current transformers
1)
VDE classification.
UL CSA C22.2 ASME JIS Title

506 -- -- -- Specialty transformers
508 -- -- -- Industrial control equipment
489 -- -- -- Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures
1012 -- -- -- Power units other than CLASS 2
1561 -- -- -- Dry-type general purpose and power transformers
5085 -- -- -- Low-voltage transformers
60601-1 -- -- -- Medical electrical equipment, Part 1: General requirements for safety (IEC 60601, EN 60601,
VDE 0750-1)
1604 -- -- -- Electrical equipment for use in CLASS I and II, Division 2 and CLASS III hazardous (Classified) locations
1059 -- -- -- Terminal blocks
6
486A-486B -- -- -- Wire connectors
486E -- -- -- Equipment wiring terminals for use with aluminum and/or copper conductors
50 -- -- -- Enclosures for electrical equipment. Non-environmental considerations
-- No. 66 -- -- Specialty transformers
-- No. 14 -- -- Industrial control equipment
-- No. 5 -- -- Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures
-- No. 107-1 -- -- General use power supplies
-- -- A17.5 / B 44.1 -- Elevator and escalator electrical equipment
-- -- -- C 8201-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear; Contactors and motor-starters
■ Approval requirements valid in different countries

Siemens low-voltage switchgear and controlgear are designed, In some cases, CSA for Canada and UL for the USA only ap-
manufactured and tested according to the relevant German prove special switchgear versions. Such special versions are lis-
standards (DIN and VDE), IEC publications and European stan- ted separately from the standard versions in the individual parts
dards (EN) as well as CSA and UL standards. The standards as- of this catalog.
signed to the single devices are stated in the relevant parts of
this catalog. For this equipment, partial limitations of the maximum permissi-
ble voltages, currents and ratings can be imposed, or special
As far as is economically viable, the requirements of the various approval and, in some cases, special identification is required.
regulations valid in other countries are also taken into account in
the design of the equipment. For use on board ship, the specifications of the marine classifi-
cation societies must be observed (see table below). In some
In some countries (see table below), an approval is required for cases, they require type tests of the components to be appro-
certain low-voltage switchgear and controlgear components. ved.
Depending on the market requirements, these components have
been submitted for approval to the authorized testing institutes.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/13

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
■ Testing bodies, approval identification and approval requirements

Country Canada 1) USA 1) China
Government-appointed or private, officially CSA UL UL CQC
recognized testing bodies (USA)
Approval symbol s c u cU u U
c UUS c UUS
c uUS c uUS
Approval requirements + + +
Remarks UL and CSA are authorized to grant approvals according to Canadian CCC
or US regulations. Please note: these approvals are frequently not reco-
gnized and additional approval often has to be obtained from the natio-
nal testing authority.
1)
For more information about UL and CSA on request. For guide numbers and file numbers for the approvals, visit our website at
■ CE marking
Manufacturers of products which fall within the scope of EC di- All the products in this catalog are in conformance with the EC
rectives must identify their products, operating instructions or directives and bear the CE marking of conformity.
packaging with a CE marking of conformity. • Low-voltage directive
The CE mark confirms that a product fulfills the appropriate ba- • EMC directive
sic requirements of all pertinent directives. The mark is a manda- • Machinery directive
tory requirement for putting products into circulation throughout
the EC. • Ex protection directive
The CE mark of conformity: >.
■ Special standards in different countries

CCC approval GOST approval for Russia
A003617
Since August 1, 2003, CCC approval is requi-
red for many products that are marketed in
China.
A GOST approval is required for all products that are to be sold

in Russia. The GOST mark has been obligatory on the pa-
ckaging of all devices since mid-1998.
All devices delivered to any part of the Russian Federation must
have this customs certification.
6 ■ Type overview of approved devices

Approvals
Canada USA China Australia Russia
s c UUS u c uUS U CCC C-Tick GOST TR
3VT molded case circui breakers up to 1600 A (MCCB)
IEC version
3VT17..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT27..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT37..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT47..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT57..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT9100-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- + -- + +
3VT9300-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- + +
3VT9500-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- + +
3VT9...-.... (Other accessories) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- + +
6/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Marine classifications
Germany Great Britain France Norway CIS Italy Poland USA
GL LRS BV DNV RMRS RINA PRS ABS
3VT molded case circui breakers up to 1600 A (MCCB)
IEC version
3VT17..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT27..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT37..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT47..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT57..-.....-0AA0 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT9100-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT9300-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT9500-.... (Switches) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
3VT9...-.... (Other accessories) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
+ Standard version approved. -- Not yet submitted for approval.
■ More information
You can find more information about standards and approvals at
If you have any question concerning UL/CSA approvals, contact
Technical Support.
More detailed information is available at
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/15

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Siemens contacts
■ Contact partners at Siemens Industry

At Siemens Industry, more than 85 000 people are resolutely
pursuing the same goal:
long-term improvement of your competitive ability.
We are committed to this goal. Thanks to our dedication, we are
continually setting new standards. In all industries – worldwide.
At your service, locally, around the globe: Partners for
consulting, sales, training, service, support, spare parts ...
on the entire Siemens Industry range.
Your personal contact can be found in our Contact Database at
www.siemens.com/automation/partner.
You start by selecting a
• Product group,
• Country,
• City,
• Service.
6/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Service & Support
The unmatched complete service
for the entire life cycle
■ Online support ■ Field Service

Our comprehensive online infor- Siemens Field Service offers
mation platform covers every support with all aspects of
aspect of our Service & Support commissioning and mainte-
and is available whenever, nance – so that the availability of
wherever. your machines and plants is
assured whatever the case.
More detailed information is available at More detailed information is available at

www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
■ Technical support ■ Spare parts

The competent consulting Plants and systems in all indus-
service for technical issues with tries worldwide are expected to
a broad range of customer- meet ever higher levels of avail-
oriented services for all our ability. We can help you rule out
products and systems. unexpected stoppages: with a
global network and optimum
logistics chains.
More detailed information is available at More detailed information is available at

www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
■ Training ■ Specification texts

Extend your lead – with practice- You can obtain qualified, free support to help you produce
related know-how straight from specifications for technically equipping non-residential and
the manufacturer. industrial buildings at
www.siemens.com/specifications
6
More detailed information is available at
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/17

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Comprehensive support from A to Z
■ Overview
Product information
Website Fast and targeted information on low-voltage power
distribution:
Newsletter Always up to date about our trend-setting products

and systems:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
Product information/product & system selection

Information and Current catalogs, customer magazines, brochures,
Download Center demo software and promotion packages:
Industry Mall Comprehensive information and order platform for

the Siemens Industry Basket:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Product & system engineering

SIMARIS Support in planning and configuring the electrical
software tools power distribution:
www.siemens.com/simaris
SIMARIS Assists in generating offers and configuring

configuration ALPHA distribution boards up to the low-voltage
planning and SIVACON S4 switchboards
configuring software www.siemens.com/scfb
Product documentation
Service & Support Comprehensive technical information - from planning
portal to configuration and operation:
Product configurator Complete selection of products and systems based

on technical characteristics or application require-
ments
CAx Download Collation of CAx data types for standard CAE and
Manager CAD systems:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/cax
My Documentation Compilation of project-specific documentation:

Manager www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mdm
6 Image database Collection of product photographs and graphics,

such as dimensional drawings and internal circuit
diagrams:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/picturedb
Product training
SITRAIN Portal Comprehensive training program about our
products, systems and engineering tools:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training
Product hotline
Technical Support Support in all technical queries about our products:
E-mail: support.automation@siemens.com
6/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Software Licenses
■ Overview
Software types Rental floating license
Software requiring a license is categorized into types. The rental floating license corresponds to the rental license,
The following software types have been defined: except that a license is not required for each installation of the
• Engineering software software. Rather, one license is required per object (for example,
user or device).
• Runtime software
Trial license
Engineering software
A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a non-
This includes all software products for creating (engineering) productive context, e.g. for testing and evaluation purposes.
user software, e.g. for configuring, programming, parameteriz- It can be transferred to another license.
ing, testing, commissioning or servicing.
Data generated with engineering software and executable Demo license
programs can be duplicated for your own use or for use by third- The demo license support the "sporadic use" of engineering soft-
parties free-of-charge. ware in a non-productive context, for example, use for testing
and evaluation purposes. It can be transferred to another
Runtime software license. After the installation of the license key, the software can
This includes all software products required for plant/machine be operated for a specific period of time, whereby usage can be
operation, e.g. operating system, basic system, system expan- interrupted as often as required.
sions, drivers, etc. One license is required per installation of the software.
The duplication of the runtime software and executable pro-
grams created with the runtime software for your own use or for Demo floating license
use by third-parties is subject to a charge. The demo floating license corresponds to the demo license,
You can find information about license fees according to use in except that a license is not required for each installation of the
the ordering data (e.g. in the catalog). Examples of categories of software. Rather, one license is required per object (for example,
use include per CPU, per installation, per channel, per instance, user or device).
per axis, per control loop, per variable, etc. Certificate of license (CoL)
Information about extended rights of use for parameteriza- The CoL is the licensee's proof that the use of the software has
tion/configuration tools supplied as integral components of the been licensed by Siemens. A CoL is required for every type of
scope of delivery can be found in the readme file supplied with use and must be kept in a safe place.
the relevant product(s).
Downgrading
License types
The licensee is permitted to use the software or an earlier ver-
Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies offers vari- sion/release of the software, provided that the licensee owns
ous types of software license: such a version/release and its use is technically feasible.
• Floating license
Delivery versions
• Single license
Software is constantly being updated.
• Rental license The following delivery versions
• Rental floating license • PowerPack
• Trial license • Upgrade
• Demo license can be used to access updates.
• Demo floating license Existing bug fixes are supplied with the ServicePack version.
Floating license
The software may be installed for internal use on any number of
PowerPack
PowerPacks can be used to upgrade to more powerful software.
6
devices by the licensee. Only the concurrent user is licensed. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL
The concurrent user is the person using the program. Use (Certificate of License) with the PowerPack. This CoL, together
begins when the software is started. with the CoL for the original product, proves that the new soft-
A license is required for each concurrent user. ware is licensed.
Single license A separate PowerPack must be purchased for each original
license of the software to be replaced.
Unlike the floating license, a single license permits only one
installation of the software per license. Upgrade
The type of use licensed is specified in the ordering data and An upgrade permits the use of a new version of the software on
in the Certificate of License (CoL). Types of use include for the condition that a license for a previous version of the product
example per instance, per axis, per channel, etc. is already held.
One single license is required for each type of use defined. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL with
the upgrade. This CoL, together with the CoL for the previous
Rental license product, proves that the new version is licensed.
A rental license supports the "sporadic use" of engineering A separate upgrade must be purchased for each original license
software. Once the license key has been installed, the software of the software to be upgraded.
can be used for a specific period of time (the operating hours do
not have to be consecutive).
One license is required for each installation of the software.
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/19

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Software Licenses
■ Overview
ServicePack Software Update Service (SUS)
ServicePacks are used to debug existing products. As part of the SUS contract, all software updates for the respec-
ServicePacks may be duplicated for use as prescribed accord- tive product are made available to you free of charge for a period
ing to the number of existing original licenses. of one year from the invoice date. The contract will automatically
be extended for one year if it is not canceled three months
License key before it expires.
Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies supplies The possession of the current version of the respective software
software products with and without license keys. is a basic condition for entering into an SUS contract.
The license key serves as an electronic license stamp and
is also the "switch" for activating the software (floating license, You can download explanations concerning license conditions from
rental license, etc.). www.siemens.com/automation/salesmaterial-as/catalog/en/
The complete installation of software products requiring license terms_of_trade_en.pdf
keys includes the program to be licensed (the software) and the
license key (which represents the license).
6/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Subject index
Numerics R
3VT1 Molded case circuit breakers up to 160 A ........................................1/1 RCD modules ............................................................................................. 1/9
3VT2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 250 A .......................................2/1 Residual current devices ............................................................................ 1/9
3VT3 Molded case circuit breakers up to 630 A ........................................3/1 Rotary operating mechanism ....................... 1/7, 2/6, 2/29, 3/6, 4/5, 5/5, 5/28
3VT4 Molded case Circuit breakers up to 1000 A ......................................4/1
S
3VT5 Molded case circuit breakers up to 1600 A ......................................5/1
Shunt trip units ............................ 1/6, 1/24, 2/5, 2/27, 3/5, 3/28, 4/4, 5/4, 5/26
A Siemens Industry Online Support App ....................................................... 6/8
Accessories and Components Techinfo ...................................................1/22 Signalling units ........................................................................... 4/4, 5/4, 5/24
Alarm switch ........................................................................................2/5, 3/5 Standard circuit breaker .................................................................... 3/11, 5/8
App Standards ..................................................................................... 6/11 ... 6/13
• Siemens Industry Online Support App ...................................................6/8 Switch disconnector 1/5, 1/12 ... 1/15, 2/3, 2/4, 2/13, 3/14 ... 3/67, 4/3, 4/4, 4/8,
Approvals ......................................................................................6/11 ... 6/13 ......................................................................................................... 5/9 ... 5/45
Auxiliary releases ......................................................................................2/27 Switch-disconnector unit ..................................................................... 4/4, 5/4
Auxiliary switches ................................1/6, 1/22, 2/5, 2/26, 3/5, 4/4, 5/4, 5/25 Switches ................................................................................................... 3/26
Switching units ............................................................................. 2/3, 4/3, 5/3
C
T
CAx Download Manager .............................................................................6/9
Circuit Breaker Trip unit .............................................................................................. 3/11, 5/8
• for Starter combination ...........................................................................1/5 U
Circuit breaker ..........1/12 ... 1/15, 2/3, 3/14 ... 3/67, 4/3, 4/4, 4/8, 5/9 ... 5/45
Undervoltage trip units ........................ 1/6, 1/24, 2/5, 2/28, 3/5, 4/4, 5/4, 5/27
• 3VT1 .............................................................................................1/3 ... 1/5
• for motor protection ................................................................................1/3 W
• for system protection .......................................................................1/4, 1/5
Withdrawable design ................................................................................ 2/41
circuit breaker ...........................................................................................2/13
Withdrawable version .................. 2/8, 3/8, 3/42 ... 3/44, 4/6, 5/6, 5/12 ... 5/13
Connecting accessories .............................................................................2/9
Connecting sets ............................................................................3/9, 4/6, 5/6
Connection parts ........................................................................................2/9
• for fixed-mounted circuit-breakers .......................................................1/10
E
ETU trip unit ..................................................................................3/4, 4/4, 5/4
G
Glossary ......................................................................................................6/2
I
Industry Mall ...............................................................................................6/7
Industry Online Support ..............................................................................6/7
Information and download center ...............................................................6/6
Interlocks ....................................................................................................1/8
L
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology on the
WWW ..........................................................................................................6/6
M 6
Manual operating mechanism ....................................................1/7, 1/9, 3/30
Mechanical interlocking .1/7, 1/25 ... 1/48, 2/6, 2/29, 2/31, 3/6, 3/32, 4/5, 5/5,
5/29
Molded Case ......1/1 ... 1/48, 2/1 ... 2/68, 3/1 ... 3/67, 4/1 ... 4/18, 5/1 ... 5/45
Molded Case Circuit-Breaker
• 3VT2 .........................................................................................2/33 ... 2/37
• 3VT3 ...........................................................................................3/1 ... 3/37
Motorized operating mechanism 1/7, 1/8, 1/9, 1/28, 2/33 ... 2/37, 3/34 ... 3/37,
.........................................................................................4/5, 5/5, 5/30 ... 5/33
• accessories for .......................................................................................2/7
• with storage spring .................................................................................2/7
Mounting accessories ........................................................1/10, 1/11, 2/8, 2/9
O
Overcurrent releases ...............................................................2/4, 4/9 ... 4/18
Overcurrent trip units ......................................2/16, 3/17 ... 3/25, 5/14 ... 5/23
P
Parallel switching .................1/7, 1/8, 1/25 ... 1/48, 2/29, 2/31, 3/6, 3/32, 5/29
parallel switching ........................................................................................2/6
Plug-in Device ....................................................................................2/38, 3/8
Plug-in version .......................................................................2/8, 3/39 ... 3/41
Product configurator ...................................................................................6/8
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/21

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Article No. index incl. export markings
■ Overview
Article-No. Page Export markings Article-No. Page Export markings
ECCN AL ECCN AL
3VT1708-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1
3VT1710-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1701-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1701-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1710-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1701-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1701-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1702-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1702-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1710-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1702-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1702-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1710-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1703-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1710-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1703-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1712-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1703-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1712-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1703-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1712-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1703-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1712-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1703-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1712-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1703-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1712-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1704-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1712-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1704-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1712-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1704-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1712-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1704-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1716-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1704-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1716-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1704-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1716-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1704-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1716-2DE36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1704-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1716-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1704-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1716-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1704-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1716-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1705-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1716-2EE46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1705-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1716-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1705-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1716-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1705-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1716-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1705-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT1792-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1705-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1792-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1705-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
6
3VT1792-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1705-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT1792-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1705-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT2
3VT1705-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1706-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N 3VT2725-2AA36-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT2725-2AA46-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N 3VT2725-2AA56-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT2725-3AA36-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N 3VT2725-3AA46-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT2725-3AA56-0AA0 2/3 N N
3VT1706-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N 3VT3
3VT1706-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT3763-2AA36-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1706-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N 3VT3763-2AA46-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1706-2EJ46-0AA0 1/4 N N 3VT3763-2AA56-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1708-2DA36-0AA0 1/3 N N 3VT3763-3AA36-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1708-2DB36-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT3763-3AA46-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1708-2DC36-0AA0 1/4 N N 3VT3763-3AA56-0AA0 3/3 N N
3VT1708-2DM36-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT4
3VT1708-2EA46-0AA0 1/3 N N
3VT4710-3AA30-0AA0 4/3 N N
3VT1708-2EB46-0AA0 1/5 N N
3VT4710-3AA38-0AA0 4/3 N N
3VT1708-2EC46-0AA0 1/4 N N
3VT1708-2EG46-0AA0 1/5 N N 3VT5
3VT1708-2EH46-0AA0 1/3 N N 3VT5716-3AA30-0AA0 5/3 N N
6/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
ECCN AL ECCN AL
3VT5716-3AA38-0AA0 5/3 N N 3VT9116-5GY42 1/9 N N

3VT91 3VT92
3VT9100-1SB00 1/6 EAR99 N 3VT9200-3HA10 2/6 N N
3VT9100-1SC00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3HA20 2/6 N N
3VT9100-1SD00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3HB20 2/6 N N
3VT9100-1SE00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3HC10 2/6 N N
3VT9100-1UC00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3HD10 2/6 N N
3VT9100-1UD00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3HL00 2/10 N N
3VT9100-1UE00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3MJ00 2/7 N N
3VT9100-1UU00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3MJ10 2/7 N N
3VT9100-1UV00 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3ML00 2/7 N N
3VT9100-2AB10 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3ML10 2/7 N N
3VT9100-2AB20 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3MN00 2/7 N N
3VT9100-2AH10 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3MN10 2/7 N N
3VT9100-2AH20 1/6 N N 3VT9200-3MQ00 2/7 N N
3VT9100-3HA10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-3MQ10 2/7 N N
3VT9100-3HA20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4ED30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HB20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4EE30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HC10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4PA30 2/8 N N
3VT9100-3HD10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4PA40 2/8 N N
3VT9100-3HE10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4RC00 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HE20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4RC30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HF20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4TA30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HG10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4TC00 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HG20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4TC30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HH10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4TN30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-3HH20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4WA30 2/8 N N
3VT9100-3HJ10 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4WA40 2/8 N N
3VT9100-3HJ20 1/7 N N 3VT9200-4WN00 2/10 N N
3VT9100-3HL00 1/11 N N 3VT9200-8BL00 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9100-3MA00 1/8 EAR99 N 3VT9200-8BN00 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9100-3MB00 1/8 EAR99 N 3VT9200-8CB30 2/10 N N
3VT9100-3MD00 1/8 EAR99 N 3VT9200-8CB40 2/10 N N
3VT9100-3ME00 1/8 EAR99 N 3VT9200-8LC10 2/7 N N
6
3VT9100-3MF00 1/11 N N 3VT9203-4TF00 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4ED30 1/10 N N 3VT9203-4TF30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4PP30 1/11 N N 3VT9210-6AC00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-4RC00 1/10 N N 3VT9210-6AP00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-4RC30 1/10 N N 3VT9210-6AS00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-4TA00 1/10 N N 3VT9210-6BC00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-4TA30 1/10 N N 3VT9215-4TD00 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4TF30 1/10 N N 3VT9215-4TD30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4TF40 1/10 N N 3VT9215-4TF00 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4TN00 1/10 N N 3VT9215-4TF30 2/9 N N
3VT9100-4TN30 1/10 N N 3VT9216-6AB00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8CA30 1/11 N N 3VT9216-6AC00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8CA40 1/11 N N 3VT9216-6AP00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8CE00 1/11 N N 3VT9216-6AS00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8CE30 1/11 N N 3VT9216-6BC00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8LA00 1/8 N N 3VT9220-6AB00 2/4 N N
3VT9100-8LB00 1/8 N N 3VT9224-4TD00 2/9 N N
3VT9115-5GY31 1/9 N N 3VT9224-4TD30 2/9 N N
3VT9115-5GY41 1/9 N N 3VT9224-4TF00 2/9 N N
3VT9116-5GA40 1/9 N N 3VT9224-4TF30 2/9 N N
3VT9116-5GB40 1/9 N N 3VT9225-6AB00 2/4 N N
3VT9116-5GY32 1/9 N N 3VT9225-6AC00 2/4 N N
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/23

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
ECCN AL ECCN AL
3VT9225-6AP00 2/4 N N 3VT9300-4ED30 3/9 N N

3VT9225-6AS00 2/4 N N 3VT9300-4EE30 3/9 N N
3VT9225-6BC00 2/4 N N 3VT9300-4PA30 3/8 N N
3VT9225-6DT00 2/4 N N 3VT9300-4PA40 3/8 N N
3VT93 3VT9300-4PL00 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9300-4RC00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1SB00 2/5 EAR99 N
3VT9300-4RC30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1SC00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4TA30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1SD00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4TC00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1SE00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4TC30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1UC00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4TN30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-1UC10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4WA30 3/8 N N
3VT9300-1UD00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4WA40 3/8 N N
3VT9300-1UD10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4WL00 2/10 N N
3VT9300-1UE00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4WL00 3/10 N N
3VT9300-1UE10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-4WN00 3/10 N N
3VT9300-2AC10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8CB30 3/10 N N
3VT9300-2AC20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8CB40 3/10 N N
3VT9300-2AD10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8CE00 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9300-2AD20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8CE30 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9300-2AE10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8LA00 2/7, 3/7 N N
3VT9300-2AE20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8LB00 2/7, 3/7 N N
3VT9300-2AF10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8LC10 3/7 N N
3VT9300-2AF20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9300-8LC20 2/7, 3/7 N N
3VT9300-2AG10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9303-4TF00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-2AG20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9303-4TF30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-2AH10 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9315-4TD00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-2AH20 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9315-4TD30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-2AJ00 2/5, 3/5 N N
3VT9315-4TF00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HA10 3/6 N N
3VT9315-4TF30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HA20 3/6 N N
3VT9324-4TD00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HB20 3/6 N N
3VT9324-4TD30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HC10 3/6 N N
3VT9324-4TF00 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HD10 3/6 N N
3VT9324-4TF30 3/9 N N
3VT9300-3HE10 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9325-6AB00 3/4 N N
6
3VT9300-3HE20 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9325-6AC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HF20 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9325-6AP00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HG10 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9325-6AS00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HG20 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9325-6BC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HG30 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9331-6AB00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HH10 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9340-6AB00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HH20 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9340-6AC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HH30 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9340-6AP00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HJ10 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9340-6AS00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HJ20 2/6, 3/6 N N
3VT9340-6BC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3HL00 3/10 N N
3VT9350-6AB00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3MF00 2/7, 3/7 N N
3VT9363-6AB00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3MF10 2/7, 3/7 N N
3VT9363-6AC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3MF20 2/10, 3/10 N N
3VT9363-6AP00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3MJ00 3/7 N N
3VT9363-6AS00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3MJ10 3/7 N N
3VT9363-6BC00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3ML00 3/7 N N
3VT9363-6DT00 3/4 N N
3VT9300-3ML10 3/7 N N
3VT9300-3MN00 3/7 N N 3VT94
3VT9300-3MN10 3/7 N N 3VT9400-4RC30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9300-3MQ00 3/7 N N 3VT9410-6AC00 4/4 N N
3VT9300-3MQ10 3/7 N N 3VT9410-6AD00 4/4 N N
6/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
ECCN AL ECCN AL
3VT9410-6AP00 4/4 N N 3VT9500-8LC40 4/5, 5/5 N N

3VT9410-6DT00 4/4 N N 3VT9510-6AC00 5/4 N N
3VT9431-6AC00 4/4 N N 3VT9510-6AD00 5/4 N N
3VT9431-6AD00 4/4 N N 3VT9510-6AP00 5/4 N N
3VT9431-6AP00 4/4 N N 3VT9512-6AC00 5/4 N N
3VT9463-6AC00 4/4 N N 3VT9512-6AD00 5/4 N N
3VT9463-6AD00 4/4 N N 3VT9512-6AP00 5/4 N N
3VT9463-6AP00 4/4 N N 3VT9516-6AC00 5/4 N N
3VT9480-6AC00 4/4 N N 3VT9516-6AD00 5/4 N N
3VT9480-6AD00 4/4 N N 3VT9516-6AP00 5/4 N N
3VT9480-6AP00 4/4 N N 3VT9516-6DT00 5/4 N N
3VT95 3VT9524-4TF30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9524-4TG30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-1SF00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9532-4TF30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-1SG00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9533-4TF30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-1SH00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9534-4TF30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-1SJ00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9563-6AC00 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1SK00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9563-6AD00 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1SL00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9563-6AP00 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1UF00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1UG00 4/4, 5/4 N N A product's export markings are updated daily at
www.siemens.com/industrymall.
3VT9500-1UH00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1UJ00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1UK00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-1UL00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-2AF10 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-2AF20 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-3HA10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HE10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HF10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HG10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HG20 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HJ10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3HL00 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-3MF20 4/7, 5/7 N N
6
3VT9500-3MN00 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3MN10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3MQ00 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-3MQ10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-4EF30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-4PL00 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-4RC30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-4RD30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-4SA40 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-4WA30 4/6, 5/6 N N
3VT9500-4WL00 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-6AE00 4/4, 5/4 N N
3VT9500-8BN00 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CC30 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CD30 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CE30 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CF30 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CG30 4/7, 5/7 N N
3VT9500-8CH30 4/7, 5/7 a.Anfr. a.Anfr.
3VT9500-8LA00 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-8LC10 4/5, 5/5 N N
3VT9500-8LC30 4/5, 5/5 N N
Siemens LV 36 · 2014 6/25

© Siemens AG 2014
Appendix
Conditions of sale and delivery
■ Overview
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software Export regulations
products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the fol- Siemens shall not be obligated to fulfill this agreement if such ful-
lowing terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the condi- fillment is prevented by any impediments arising out of national
tions for supplies and services, including software products, by or international foreign trade or customs requirements or any
any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Germa- embargoes or other sanctions.
ny, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and Con-
ditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms ap- If Purchaser transfers goods (hardware and/ or software and/ or
ply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG. technology as well as corresponding documentation, regardless
of the mode of provision) delivered by Siemens or works and
For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany services (including all kinds of technical support) performed by
The “General Terms of Payment” as well as the “General Condi- Siemens to a third party worldwide, Purchaser shall comply with
tions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical all applicable national and international (re-) export control reg-
and Electronics Industry” shall apply. ulations. In any event Purchaser shall comply with the (re-) ex-
port control regulations of the Federal Republic of Germany, of
For software products, the “General License Conditions for Soft- the European Union and of the United States of America.
ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office in Germany” shall apply. If required to conduct export control checks, Purchaser, upon
request by Siemens, shall promptly provide Siemens with all in-
For customers with a seat or registered office outside of formation pertaining to particular end customer, destination and
Germany intended use of goods, works and services provided by Sie-
mens, as well as any export control restrictions existing.
The “General Terms of Payment” as well as the “General Condi-
tions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Cus- Purchaser shall indemnify and hold harmless Siemens from and
tomers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany” shall against any claim, proceeding, action, fine, loss, cost and dam-
apply. ages arising out of or relating to any noncompliance with export
control regulations by Purchaser, and Purchaser shall compen-
For software products, the “General License Conditions for Soft- sate Siemens for all losses and expenses resulting thereof, un-
ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a less such noncompliance was not caused by fault of the Pur-
Seat or registered Office outside of Germany” shall apply. chaser. This provision does not imply a change in burden of
General proof.
The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the Ger- The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to
man law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only European / German and/or US export regulations.
apply to devices for export. Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval
Illustrations are not binding. by the competent authorities.
Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages, According to current provisions, the following export regulations
- especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given - must be observed with respect to the products featured in this
these are subject to change without prior notice. catalog / price list:
The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging.
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. AL Number of the German Export List
It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to Products marked other than “N” require an export license.
the applicable legal regulations. In the case of software products, the export designations of the
relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit
the prices valid at the time of delivery. Goods labeled with an “AL“ not equal to “N” are subject to Eu-
ropean or German export authorization when being exported
Surcharges will be added to the prices of products that contain out of the EU.
silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective ba- ECCN Export Control Classification Number
sic official prices for these metals are exceeded. These sur-
charges will be determined based on the official price and the Products marked other than “N” are subject to a reexport
6
license to specific countries.
metal factor of the respective product.
In the case of software products, the export designations of the
The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to.
on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release
Goods labeled with “ECCN“ not equal to “N” are subject to US
order. re-export authorization.
The metal factor determines the official price as of which the
metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method used. Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authoriza-
The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with the tion may be required due to the final end-use and destination for
price information of the respective products. which the goods are to be used.
You will find In addition, you can preview the export designations via our "In-
• an exact explanation of the metal factor dustry Mall" online catalog system in the respective product de-
scription. The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export autho-
• the text of the Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale rization indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and in-
and Delivery of Siemens AG voices.
in the Internet under
www.siemens.com/automation/salesmaterial-as/catalog/en Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
/terms_of_trade_en.pdf
6/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

© Siemens AG 2014
Catalogs
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Low-Voltage Power Distribution
Further information can be obtained from our branch offices
listed at www.siemens.com/automation/partner
System Solutions for Industry Catalog Low-Voltage Power Distribution and Catalog
Interactive Catalog on DVD Electrical Installation Technology
Products for Automation and Drives, Low-Voltage Power CA 01 SENTRON · SIVACON · ALPHA LV 10
Distribution and Electrical Installation Technology Protection, Switching, Measuring and Monitoring
Devices, Switchboards and Distribution Systems
Building Control Standards-Compliant Components for LV 11
GAMMA Building Control ET G1 Photovoltaic Plants
3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A LV 35
Drive Systems Digital: 3VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A LV 36
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units D 11 Digital: SIVACON System Cubicles, System Lighting LV 50
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units and System Air-Conditioning
SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150 D 12 Digital: ALPHA Distribution Systems LV 51
Medium-Voltage Converters
ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks LV 52
ROBICON Perfect Harmony D 15.1
Medium-Voltage Air-Cooled Drives SIVACON S4 Power Distribution Boards LV 56
Germany Edition SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems LV 70
Digital: SINAMICS G180 D 18.1 Digital: DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets ET D1
Converters – Compact Units, Cabinet Systems,
Cabinet Units Air-Cooled and Liquid-Cooled Motion Control
SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and D 21.3
SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE NC 60
Cabinet Modules
Automation Systems for Machine Tools
SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS DCM Converter Units D 23.1 SINUMERIK & SINAMICS NC 61
Equipment for Machine Tools
SINAMICS DCM Cabinet D 23.2
SINUMERIK 840D sl Type 1B NC 62
SINAMICS and Motors for Single-Axis Drives D 31
Three-Phase Induction Motors SIMOTICS HV, D 84.1
SINUMERIK 808 NC 81.1
SIMOTICS TN
• Series H-compact
• Series H-compact PLUS SINUMERIK 828 NC 82
Asynchronous Motors Standardline D 86.1
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 & SIMOTICS PM 21
Synchronous Motors with Permanent-Magnet D 86.2 Equipment for Production Machines
Technology, HT-direct
Drive and Control Components for Cranes CR 1
DC Motors DA 12
SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis DA 21.1
Converters Power Supply
SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters DA 21.2 Power supply SITOP KT 10.1
Digital: SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital DA 22
Converter Cabinet Units Safety Integrated
SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems DA 45 Safety Technology for Factory Automation SI 10
SIEMOSYN Motors DA 48
MICROMASTER 420/430/440 Inverters DA 51.2
SIMATIC HMI/PC-based Automation
MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411 DA 51.3
Human Machine Interface Systems/ ST 80/
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control DA 65.10 PC-based Automation ST PC
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control DA 65.11
Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for DA 65.3
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES SIMATIC Ident
SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO DA 65.4 Industrial Identification Systems ID 10
Note: Additional catalogs on SIMODRIVE or SINAMICS
drive systems and SIMOTICS motors with SINUMERIK SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems
and SIMOTION can be found under Motion Control Products for Totally Integrated Automation ST 70
Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System ST PCS 7
SIMOTICS Low-Voltage Motors D 81.1 System components
MOTOX Geared Motors D 87.1 SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System ST PCS 7 T
SIMOGEAR Geared Motors MD 50.1 Technology components
SIMOGEAR Gearboxes with adapter MD 50.11 Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7 ST PCS 7 AO
Process Control System
Mechanical Driving Machines
FLENDER Standard Couplings MD 10.1
SIMATIC NET
FLENDER High Performance Couplings MD 10.2
FLENDER SIG Standard industrial gear unit MD 30.1 Industrial Communication IK PI
FLENDER SIP Standard industrial planetary gear units MD 31.1
SIRIUS Industrial Controls
Process Instrumentation and Analytics SIRIUS Industrial Controls IC 10
Field Instruments for Process Automation FI 01
Digital: SIPART Controllers and Software MP 31
Products for Weighing Technology WT 10
Digital: Process Analytical Instruments PA 01
Digital: Process Analytics, PA 11
Components for the System Integration
Information and Download Center
Digital: These catalogs are only available as a PDF Digital versions of the catalogs are available on the Internet at:
and/or as an e-book. www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial
© Siemens AG 2014
Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice The information provided in this catalog contains merely general
Infrastructure & Cities Sector PDF (E86060-K1836-A101-A6-7600) descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual
use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result
Low and Medium Voltage Division KG 0214 280 En
of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the
Low Voltage & Products Produced in Germany respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the
Postfach 10 09 53 © Siemens AG 2014 terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject
93009 REGENSBURG to change without notice.
GERMANY All product designations may be trademarks or product names
of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties
for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

Catálogo Disjuntores 3VT LV36 2014 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Catálogo Disjuntores 3VT LV36 2014 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catálogo Disjuntores 3VT LV36 2014 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

© Siemens AG 2014

3VT Molded Case

Answers for infrastructure and cities.

Related catalogs Contents

Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10 · ·

3WT Air Circuit Breakers LV 35 3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A

3VT Molded Case Circuit Breakers LV 36 ·

Trademarks Technical Support

The products and sys-

Refer to the Industry Mall for current updates

The right one for everyone Sustainability in focus

Our portfolio includes switchboards, As a worldwide leader in the provision of

Universal, safe and intelligent

Whether in industrial plants, in infrastructure or in

buildings: every technical plant depends on the reliable

supply of electricity. Our products provide a safe, reliable

and efficient electrical infrastructure at the medium- and

low-voltage levels. Our components reliably protect

against accidents, disturbances and fires caused by

electrical installations and allow consumers to utilize

electrical power in a sustainable, responsible manner.

We are happy to help you with comprehensive support

from the initial information through to operation.

Everything for power distribution Excellent support

Get all the information you need –

Always at your service

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Information 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

1 3VT circuit breaker 11 Adapter to install on 35 mm DIN rail 22 Coupling driver

1/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2014

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

■ Selection and ordering data

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

160 4-pole 3VT1716-2EE46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

■ Selection and ordering data

Alarm switches for signalling the tripping of the circuit breaker

Shunt trip units

Undervoltage trip units

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

■ Selection and ordering data

• lockable with padlock yellow 3VT9100-3HB20 1 unit 0.079

• for lateral operation, gray 3VT9100-3HC10 1 unit 0.137

• lockable with padlock black 3VT9100-3HE20 1 unit 0.021

• lockable with padlock red 3VT9100-3HF20 1 unit 0.019

Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism

• length 199 ... 352 mm, telescopic 3VT9100-3HJ20 1 unit 0.092

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

Mechanical interlocking for parallel switching 3VT9100-8LB00 1 unit 0.109

Rated control supply voltage Us DT Article No. PS*/ Weight